Red Lion Controls Catalog Ver 23

Red Lion Controls Catalog Ver 23
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLERS
F
The Trusted Source for
Innovative Control
Solutions
1-717-767-6511
483
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
CONTROL
CUB5RT/TC
Description
Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)
Display
CUB4RT
I N D I C AT I O N
PAXLRT
PAXLTC
RTD/Thermocouple Meter With
Output Option Card Capability
RTD Temperature Indicator
1/8 DIN RTD Temperature
Indicator
1/8 DIN Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator
39 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)
39 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)
50 mm (H) x 97 mm (W)
50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)
5 Digit, .48" (12mm) Reflective
and Red Backlight LCD
5 Digit, .48" (12mm) Reflective
and Red Backlight LCD
4 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED
4 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED
RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
RTD
Pt385 and Pt392
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD (CUB5RT)
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Input Ranges
Thermocouple (CUB5TC)
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
Control
Yes
No
No
No
Outputs
Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking
No
No
No
No
No
No
Communications
RS232
RS485
F
Other Features/
Options
User Input
Min/Max Memory
Custom Units Indicato
Programmable F or C
Annunciator
Programmable Offset,
Peak/Valley Memory,
Custom Units Overlay
Programmable Offset,
Peak/Valley Memory,
Custom Units Overlay
Power Source
9 to 28 VDC
9 - 26 VDC @ 25 mA
With Backlighting 65 mA
85 to 250 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
Page Number
Page 489/501
*
Page 521
Page 513
*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card
484
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PAXLT
Description
Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)
Display
RTD and Thermocouple Meter
With Setpoint Capability
50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)
5 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED
RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Input Ranges
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
CONTROL
DP5T
1/8 DIN RTD and Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator
PAXT
PID CONTROL
T16
1/8 DIN RTD and Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator
1/16 DIN Temperature Controller
50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)
50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)
48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED
4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .3" (7mm) Red
Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Green LED
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and C
RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Direct
10 Ohm, 100 Ohm, and mV
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, and mV
RTD
2 or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385, .00391 and
.00672)
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2 or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)
Control
Yes
No
On/Off
On/Off, PID
Outputs
Dual Form C
No
Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing
Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling
Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive)
No
RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8
No
Communications
No
F
User Input
Min/Max Memory,
Custom Units Overlay
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Custom Units Overlay
Analog Output*,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer, Linearizer,
Custom Units Overlay
Analog Output
Power Source
50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC
85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
Page Number
Page 528
Page 539
Page 540
Page 541
Other Features/
Options
*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card
1-717-767-6511
485
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PID CONTROL
T48
TCU
TSC
P16
1/8 DIN Temperature Controller
1/8 DIN Temperature Setpoint
Controller
1/16 DIN Process Controller
48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
Display
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .3" (7mm) Red
Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Green LED
Input Ranges
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2, 3, or 4 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2, 3, or 4 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)
Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA
Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA
On/Off, PID
On/Off, PID
On/Off, PID
On/Off, PID
Description 1/16 DIN Temperature Controller
Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)
Control
Outputs
Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling
Output, Dual Alarms
Output, Dual Alarms
Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
Field Replaceable
Field Replaceable
Field Replaceable
Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output,
Dual Alarms
Communications
RS485
RS485
RS485
No
Other Features/
Options
Heater Current Monitor,
Analog Output,
Remote Setpoint
Heater Current Monitor,
Analog Output,
Remote Setpoint
Analog Output
Analog Output
Power Source
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
115/230 VAC
115/230 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
Page Number
Page 566
Page 574
Page 583
Page 590
F
*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card
486
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PSC
CONTROL
TLA
1/8 DIN Process Controller
1/8 DIN Process Setpoint
Controller
1/16 DIN Temperature Limit
Alarm
48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED
Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA
Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2, or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)
Control
On/Off, PID
On/Off, PID
On/Off, PID
On/Off
Outputs
Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output,
Dual Alarms
(Relay Only)
Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
Field Replaceable
Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
Field Replaceable
Limit Alarm
Relay
Alarm Output
Single or Dual Relay
RS485
RS485
RS485
No
Description
Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)
Display
Input Ranges
Communications
P48
PID CONTROL
PCU
1/16 DIN Process Controller
F
Other Features/
Options
Dual Setpoint,
Remote Setpoint,
Analog Output
Motorized Valve Positioner,
Analog Output,
Remote Setpoint
Analog Output
No
Power Source
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
115/230 VAC
115/230 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC
Page Number
Page 591
Page 596
Page 604
Page 611
*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card
1-717-767-6511
487
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT
WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER
FEATURES
MODEL NUMBER
Q Display:
4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Construction:
Q Power
APLTC
Q Display:
4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Metal Front Bezel
Q Power
Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement:
Thermocouple
IMR
Q Display:
6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement: RTD
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Metal Front Bezel
Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement:
RTD
PAXT
Q Display:
6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Q Display:
4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Construction:
Metal Front Bezel
Q Power
IMT
Thermocouple
PAXLTC
4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power
Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement:
Q Display:
Q Construction:
FEATURES
Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple
PAXT
Q Display:
5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective, Green and Red Backlight
LCD
Q Display:
5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective and Red Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: 9 to 26 VDC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple
CUB4TC
Q Power
CUB5TC
Thermocouple
Q Display:
5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective, Green and Red Backlight
LCD
Q Display:
5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective and Red Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: 9 to 26 VDC
Q Measurement: RTD
CUB4RT
Source: 9 to 28 VDC
Q Measurement:
Q Power
CUB5RT
Source: 9 to 28 VDC
Q Measurement:
RTD
Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.
F
488
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL CUB5TC - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT
THERMOCOUPLE METER
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 TEMPERATURE STANDARD
z COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (Enable/Disable)
z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.48" (12.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULES (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z FRONT PANEL OR CRIMSON PROGRAMMABLE
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT
z THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS
Thermocouple types T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, or mV
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z SELECTABLE °F or °C WITH 1 or 0.1 DEGREE RESOLUTION
z °F OR °C DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C
UL
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5TC accepts a thermocouple input and provides a temperature display
in Celcius or Farenheit. The meter also features minimum and maximum
display capture, display offset, °F or °C indicator, and programmable user input.
The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the
selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
F
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
1-717-767-6511
489
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
MODEL NO.
CUB5
DESCRIPTION
CUB5TC
Optional Plug-in Cards
CUB5TCR0
Thermocouple Meter with Backlight Display
CUB5TCB0
CUB5RLY
Single Relay Output Card
CUB5RLY0
CUB5SNK
Dual Sinking Output Card
CUB5SNK0
RS485 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM1
RS232 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM2
USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products
CUB5USB0
CUB5COM
CUB5USB
MLPS1
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
MLPS1000
CBLPROG
RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)
CBLPROG0
CBPRO
RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)
CBPRO007
SFCRD
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
USB Programming Cable
SFCRD200
Accessories
CBLUSB
1
PART NUMBER
Thermocouple Meter with Reflective Display
CBLUSB00
Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5TCR0: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5TCB0: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a NEC Class 2 or
SELV rated power supply.
INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0
MODEL
NO.
DISPLAY COLOR
CUB5TCR0
CUB5TCB0
CUB5TCB0
--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)
10 mA
85 mA
95 mA
40 mA
115 mA
125 mA
3. READOUT:
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degrees
Scale: °F or °C
Offset Range: -999 to 9999 display units
4. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Isolation: TC+ and TC- terminals are not electrically isolated from the power
supply or optional comms cards.
Response Time: 500 msec.
Open Sensor Display: OPEN
Overrange/Underrange Input: OLOL/ULUL
Overrange/Underrange Display : “.....”/“-.....”
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 VDC, TC+ to TCMaximum Input Voltage TC-: 3 VDC max. with respect to common
F
TC TYPE
T
E
J
K
R
S
B
RANGE
-200 to 400°C
-328 to 752°F
-200 to 871°C
-328 to 1600°F
-200 to 760°C
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to 1372°C
-328 to 2502°F
-50 to 1768°C
-58 to 3214°F
-50 to 1768°C
-58 to 3214°F
200 to 1820°C
392 to 3308°F
ACCURACY ACCURACY
@ 23°C
@ -35 to 75°C
±°C
±°C
2.3
2.7
1.9
2.3
4.5
4.5
9.1<540°C
4.5>540°C
N
-200 to 1300°C
-328 to 2372°F
2.8
mV
-10.00 to 65.00
0.02 mV
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
(+) blue
5.8
(-) red
(+) purple
4.9
(-) red
(+) white
4.3
(-) red
(+) yellow
5.8
(-) red
no
15.0
standard
no
15.0
standard
42.6<540°C no
15.0>540°C standard
(+) orange
8.1
(-) red
no
0.08 mV
standard
BS 1843
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) yellow
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
no
standard
(+) orange
(-) blue
no
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a -35 to 75°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the -35 to
75°C operating range includes meter tempco and cold junction tracking effects.
490
The specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity,
and thermocouple cold junction compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum
of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the
meter readout at the temperature of interest.
5. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control,
and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCR0: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCB0 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL
Red Display
Green Display
1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5
Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)
TEMPERATURE
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS
The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
1.0 INSTALLING
INSTALLATION
THE
DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Note: Non-grounded (isolated) thermocouple probes must be used when
multiple units are connected in an RS485 network, or measurement
errors will occur.
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable (refer to CUB5COM bulletin)
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
METER
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the
unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to
the back of the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel
cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
F
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
1-717-767-6511
491
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before
accessing inside of the meter.
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter.
Setpoint Card
Comms Card
3.0 WIRING
THE
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
F
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
492
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.1 POWER WIRING
3.2 USER INPUT WIRING
DC Power
Sinking Logic
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC
USR COMM
USR
}
Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.
The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).
3.3 INPUT WIRING
Thermocouple
CAUTION: Power input common and sensor input common are NOT isolated
from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the power input common and the sensor input common must
be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or
input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous
live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common
terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of
the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of
the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.
3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
F
Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load must
be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.
3.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD
RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS
1-717-767-6511
493
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 REVIEWING
BUTTON
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
ENTERING PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
SEL
Index display through enabled values
Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
RST
Resets values (MIN / MAX) or outputs
Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value
“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.
Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.
5.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
F
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)
It is recommended that all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL button with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.
MODULE MENU (SEL BUTTON)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL button is pressed to advance to a particular
parameter to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding
parameters. After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO.
Programming may continue by accessing additional modules.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST button is used to move through
the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL button, stores and
activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next
parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST button to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST button again increments the
digit by one or the user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically
scroll. The SEL button will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the
SEL button will enter the value and move to the next parameter.
494
PROGRAMMING TIPS
FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up will also load the
factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a
memory failure or corrupted data.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
USrIN
«
ª
N0
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU
THERMOCOUPLE TYPE
tYPE
ª
«
tc-J
SELECTION TC TYPE
T
tc-t
tc-E
tc-j
tc-K
tc-r
E
J
K
SELECTION
TC TYPE
tc-S
tc-b
tc-n
VOLt
S
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.
B
N
R
Select the thermocouple type used for the application. The appropriate curve
will be automatically loaded for the selected type.
Selecting VOLt displays the millivolt input signal with 10 μV resolution.
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION
CJC
«
ª
yES
yES
NO
bANd
«
ª
10
TEMPERATURE SCALE
°F
USrIN
«
ª
NO
°C
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT
ª
«
0
0.0
0
Select the decimal point location for the desired display resolution. This
selection applies for the Input, MAX and MIN displays. This parameter does
not appear if tYPE = VOLt or for types R, S or B thermocouples which have a
fixed 1 degree resolution.
OFSEt
ª
«
0
USER INPUT FUNCTION
DISPLAY MODE
Select the temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input, MAX and
MIN displays. This parameter does not appear if tYPE = VOLt.
dECPt
00 to 199 display units
The filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the variation
exceeds the input filter band value, the filter disengages. When the variation
becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This allows for a
stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large process
change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of the Display
Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the filter permanently
engaged at the filter level selected above.
This parameter enables or disables internal cold junction compensation. For
most applications, cold junction compensation should be enabled (yES). This
parameter does not appear if tYPE = VOLt.
SCALE «
ª
°F
FILTER BAND
DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE
-999 to 9999
The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be
used to compensate for probe errors, errors due to variances in probe placement
or adjusting the readout to a reference thermometer.
DESCRIPTION
NO
P-Loc
No Function
User Input disabled.
rESEt
Reset (Edge triggered)
d-HLd
Display Hold
d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr
Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)
Print
Print Request
Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).
P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12
Print and Reset
Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).
Setpoint 1 Reset
Resets setpoint 1 output.
Setpoint 2 Reset
Resets setpoint 2 output.
Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset
Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.
See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Resets the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.
Program Mode Lock-out
Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).
Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).
F
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
FILtr
ª
«
1
FILTER SETTING
U-ASN
0,1 2 3
ª
If the displayed temperature is difficult to read due to small process
variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display.
Software filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading
with a fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
«
dSP
HI
LO
HI-LO
dSP
Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset, display hold, or print and
reset is selected in the User Input Function menu.
1-717-767-6511
495
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU
CALIBRATION
MAX DISPLAY ENABLE
HI-En
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.
MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
HI-t
«
ª
2.0
0.0 to 999.9 sec.
When the Input Display is above the present MAX value for the entered
delay time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MAX reading.
A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
LO-En
ª
NO
NO
YES
MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
«
ª
2.0
0.0 to 999.9 sec.
When the Input Display is below the present MIN value for the entered delay
time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MIN reading. A delay
time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
F
FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS
FCS
«
ª
NO
NO
yES
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
«
ª
66
48
Cold Junction Calibration
1. Install all option cards needed for your application and the rear cover,
or invalid results will occur.
2. The ambient temperature must be within 20°C to 30°C.
3. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K, or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
4. Enter programming mode and verify the following settings in Module 1:
tYPE = thermocouple type connected to the unit
CJC = YES; SCALE = °C; dECPt = 0.0; OFSEt = 0
Select YES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.
CodE
ª
1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the TC+ (positive) and the TC- (negative) terminals of the CUB5TC. Set
the output of the voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select INP.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0u.
5. With the voltage source set to zero, press SEL. Display reads CALC for about
eight seconds.
6. When display reads 60.0u, apply 60.000 mV input signal. Press SEL. Display
reads CALC for about eight seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press SEL twice to exit Module 2 and return to
the normal display mode.
8. Proceed to Cold Junction Calibration.
Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.
LO-t
«
Input Voltage Calibration
MIN DISPLAY ENABLE
«
CodE
The CUB5TC uses stored voltage calibration and cold
junction temperature values to provide accurate
temperature and voltage measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter could slowly change. The result is that the stored
calibration values may no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most
applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5TC involves a voltage calibration and a cold
junction calibration. It is recommended that both calibrations be performed.
The voltage calibration MUST precede the cold junction calibration. Allow 30
minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The
following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to
35 °C (59 to 95 °F).
Calibration should only be performed by individuals experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment.
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5TC.
5. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath of known temperature
could be used in place of the thermometer.)
6. Compare the unit display with the reference temperature indicator (or
calibration bath). If a difference of more than ±1.0 °C exists, note the
difference (CJ error) and continue with cold junction calibration.
CJ Error = Reference Temperature - Unit Display.
Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press SEL button to exit the module.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up
will also load the factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in
the event of a memory failure or corruted data.
7. Enter programming mode. Step through Module 2 to the Service Access
Code parameter and select CodE 48. Press and hold the SEL button until the
unit displays CAL NO. Press the RST button to select CJC.
8. Press SEL. Display reads CJC followed by the current cold junction value.
Calculate a new cold junction value as follows:
New cold junction = Current cold junction + CJ Error (noted above)
9. Press RST and set the display to the new cold junction value. Press and hold
SEL. Display reads CALC for about four seconds and then returns to CAL NO.
10. Press SEL twice to exit calibration and return to the normal display mode.
Verify the input reading is correct. If not, repeat steps 6 through 10.
496
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)
PARAMETER MENU
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME
dSP-t «
ª
1
0.5
1
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-LEV
seconds
2
ª
This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.
ª
«
yES
NO
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
ª
The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)
rSt
ª
«
dSP
NO
HI
LO
HI-LO
dSP
This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).
«
ª
NO
yES
«
000
not
P-Loc
______
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
ª
«
rEd
to
999
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (P-Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending on the
code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the CodE prompt
appears (see chart).
NO
The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds.
COLOr
000
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
ScroL
5
to
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.
CodE
yES
1
5
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
SEL
«
Active
0
Full Programming
Immediate Access
1-99
Quick Programming
After Quick
Programming with
correct code entry at
CodE prompt *
100-999
CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *
0
Programming Lock
No Access
1-99
Quick Programming
No Access
100-999
CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *
0-999
Full Programming
Immediate Access
P-Loc
rEd
6rn
Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.
Not Active
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
F
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
1-717-767-6511
497
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU
The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.
SETPOINT VALUE
SPt-n
ª
SETPOINT SELECT
SPSEL
«
ª
NO
NO
SP-1
SETPOINT 2 ENABLE
«
ª
NO
YES
100
-9999 to 99999
Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.
SP-2
Enter the setpoint (output) to be programmed. The n in the following
parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number. After the chosen setpoint
is completely programmed, the display will return to SPSEL. Repeat steps for
each setpoint to be programmed. Select NO to exit the module. The number of
setpoints available is setpoint output card dependent.
Enb-2
«
NO
Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.
HYSTERESIS VALUE
HYS-n
ª
«
1
to
59999
2
Enter desired hysteresis value. See Setpoint Output Figures for visual
explanation of how setpoint output actions (balanced and unbalanced) are
affected by the hysteresis. When the setpoint is a control output, usually
balanced hysteresis is used. For alarm applications, usually unbalanced
hysteresis is used. For unbalanced hysteresis modes, the hysteresis functions on
the low side for high acting setpoints and functions on the high side for low
acting setpoints.
Note: Hysteresis eliminates output chatter at the switch point, while time delay
can be used to prevent false triggering during process transient events.
ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION
Act-n «
ª HI-Ub
LO-bL
HI-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub
Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.
HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub
F
tON-n
«
ª
0.0
0.0
to
599.9 Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning on
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
=
High Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
tOF-n
«
=
Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
ª
0.0
OFF TIME DELAY
0.0
to
599.9 Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning off
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
OUTPUT RESET ACTION
rSt-n
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =
HI-bL
Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =
LO-bL
ª
«
Auto
Auto
LAtCH
L-dLY
Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.
Auto = Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset off
at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.
LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
498
HI-Ub
Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
LO-Ub
the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
When the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the
corresponding “on” output is reset immediately and remains off until the
trigger point is crossed again. (Previously latched alarms will be off if power
up Display Value is lower than setpoint value.)
L-dLY = Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures. Latch
means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST button
or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle. When
the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter
delays the event until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off
point. (Previously latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower
than setpoint value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous L-dLY
reset if it is not activated at power up.)
STANDBY OPERATION
Stb-n
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and OutputReset Action.
PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION
«
brn-n
ª
OFF
OFF
ON
Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(open), the output can be programmed to be on or off.
CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE
Setpoint Output Reset Actions
ª
«
NO
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.
OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
rEn-n
ChC-n
YES
YES
This parameter enables the RST button or user input to reset the output when
the display is reset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to dSP and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions are
not met, the output will not reset.
5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
PARAMETER MENU
F
The Serial Setup Parameters are only active when the optional RS232 or RS485 serial communications module is installed in the meter. Refer to the CUB5COM
bulletin for complete details on CUB5 serial communications.
1-717-767-6511
499
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CUB5TC PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.
F
500
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL CUB5RT - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT RTD METER
z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.48" (12.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULES (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z FRONT PANEL OR CRIMSON PROGRAMMABLE
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z RTD INPUTS
RTD types Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, Cu427
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z SELECTABLE °F or °C WITH 1 or 0.1 DEGREE RESOLUTION
z °F OR °C DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C
UL
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5RT accepts an RTD input and provides a temperature display in
Celcius or Farenheit. The meter also features minimum and maximum display
capture, display offset, °F or °C indicator, and programmable user input. The
display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the selected
displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion® Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
F
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
1-717-767-6511
501
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
CUB5
Optional Plug-in Cards
Accessories
1
MODEL NO.
CUB5RT
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
RTD Meter with Reflective Display
CUB5RTR0
RTD Meter with Backlight Display
CUB5RTB0
CUB5RLY
Single Relay Output Card
CUB5RLY0
CUB5SNK
Dual Sinking Output Card
CUB5SNK0
CUB5COM
RS485 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM1
CUB5USB
USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products
CUB5USB0
MLPS1
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
MLPS1000
CBLPROG
RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)
CBLPROG0
CBPRO
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
SFCRD200
CBLUSB
USB Programming Cable
CBLUSB00
Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5RTR0: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5RTB0: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a NEC Class 2 or
SELV rated power supply.
F
MODEL
NO.
DISPLAY COLOR
CUB5RTR0
CUB5RTB0
CUB5RTB0
--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)
INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0
10 mA
85 mA
95 mA
40 mA
115 mA
125 mA
3. READOUT:
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degrees
Scale: °F or °C
Offset Range: -19999 to 19999 display units
4. RTD INPUTS:
Isolation: Input and EXC terminals are not electrically isolated from the
power supply or optional comms cards.
Response Time: 500 msec.
Failed Sensor Display: OPEN or Short
Overrange/Underrange Input: OLOL/ULUL
Overrange/Underrange Display : “.....”/“-.....”
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 VDC
Type: 2, 3 or 4 wire
Excitation current: 100 ohm range: 165 μA
10 ohm range: 2.5 mA
Lead resistance: 100 ohm range: 10 ohm/lead max.
10 ohm range: 3 ohms/lead max.
Balanced Lead Resistance: Automatically compensated up to max per lead.
Unbalanced Lead Resistance: Uncompensated.
INPUT TYPE
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00392
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427
RANGE
ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
-80 to 260°C
0.2°C
0.5°C
-100 to 260°C
0.4°C
0.9°C
STANDARD
IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a -35 to 75°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the -35 to
75°C operating range includes meter tempco effects. The specification includes
the A/D conversion errors and linearization conformity. Total system accuracy
is the sum of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field
calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
502
5. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCR0: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCB0 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL
Red Display
Green Display
1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5
10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)
TEMPERATURE
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C
Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS
The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
1.0 INSTALLING
INSTALLATION
THE
DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Note: Non-grounded (isolated) RTD probes must be used when multiple units
are connected in an RS485 network, or measurement errors will occur.
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable (refer to CUB5COM bulletin)
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
METER
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch
from the unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear
of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit
should be installed fully assembled. Insert the
unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
F
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any
kind (screwdrivers, pens,
pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
1-717-767-6511
503
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2.0 SETTING
THE
JUMPERS
INPUT RANGE JUMPER
This jumper is used to select the proper input range. The input range selected
in programming must match the jumper setting. Select a range that is high
enough to accommodate the maximum input signal to avoid overloads. To
access the jumper, remove the rear cover of the meter.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
2.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before
accessing inside of the meter.
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter.
Range Jumpers
Setpoint Card
Comms Card
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
3.0 WIRING
THE
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
F
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
504
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.1 POWER WIRING
3.2 USER INPUT WIRING
DC Power
Sinking Logic
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC
USR COMM
USR
}
Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.
The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).
3.3 INPUT WIRING
3-WIRE RTD
2-WIRE RTD
CAUTION: Power input common and sensor input common are NOT isolated
from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the power input common and the sensor input common must
be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or
input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous
live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common
terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of
the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of
the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.
3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
F
Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load
must be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.
3.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD
RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS
1-717-767-6511
505
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 REVIEWING
BUTTON
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
ENTERING PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
SEL
Index display through enabled values
Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
RST
Resets values (MIN / MAX) or outputs
Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value
“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.
Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.
5.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
F
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)
It is recommended that all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL button with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.
MODULE MENU (SEL BUTTON)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL button is pressed to advance to a particular
parameter to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding
parameters. After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO.
Programming may continue by accessing additional modules.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST button is used to move through
the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL button, stores and
activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next
parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST button to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST button again increments the
digit by one or the user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically
scroll. The SEL button will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the
SEL button will enter the value and move to the next parameter.
506
PROGRAMMING TIPS
FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up will also load the
factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a
memory failure or corrupted data.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
USrIN
«
ª
N0
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU
RTD TYPE
«
tYPE
ª
Pt385
SELECTION
TYPE
RANGE JUMPERS
Pt385
Pt392
Ni672
Cu427
RTD Platinum 385
100 ohm
RTD Platinum 392
100 ohm
RTD Nickel 672
100 ohm
RTD Copper 10 Ω
10 ohm
Select the RTD type used for the application. The appropriate curve will be
automatically loaded for the selected type. The position of the Input Range
Jumper must match the RTD type selected.
SCALE
«
ª
°F
bANd
«
ª
10
FILTER BAND
00 to 199 display units
The filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the variation
exceeds the input filter band value, the filter disengages. When the variation
becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This allows for a
stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large process
change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of the Display
Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the filter permanently
engaged at the filter level selected in the previous parameter.
TEMPERATURE SCALE
°F
°C
Select the temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input, MAX and
MIN displays.
USrIN
«
ª
NO
USER INPUT FUNCTION
DISPLAY MODE
DESCRIPTION
NO
P-Loc
No Function
rESEt
Reset (Edge triggered)
d-HLd
Display Hold
Select the decimal point location for the desired display resolution. This
selection applies for the Input, MAX and MIN displays.
d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr
Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)
DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE
Print
Print Request
Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).
P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12
Print and Reset
Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).
Setpoint 1 Reset
Resets setpoint 1 output.
Setpoint 2 Reset
Resets setpoint 2 output.
Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset
Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT
dECPt
ª
OFSEt
ª
«
0
0
-19999 to 19999
The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be
used to compensate for probe errors, errors due to variances in probe placement
or adjusting the readout to a reference thermometer.
FILtr
ª
«
1
See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Resets the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.
Program Mode Lock-out
0.0
0
«
User Input disabled.
FILTER SETTING
Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).
Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).
F
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
U-ASN
0,1 2 3
If the displayed temperature is difficult to read due to small process
variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display.
Software filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading
with a fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.
ª
«
dSP
HI
LO
HI-LO
dSP
Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset, display hold, or print and
reset is selected in the User Input Function menu.
1-717-767-6511
507
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU
CALIBRATION
MAX DISPLAY ENABLE
HI-En
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.
MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
HI-t
«
ª
2.0
0.0 to 999.9 sec.
When the Input Display is above the present MAX value for the entered
delay time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MAX reading.
A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
CodE
«
ª
48
The CUB5RT uses stored resistance calibration values
to provide accurate temperature measurements. Over
time, the electrical characteristics of the components
inside the meter could slowly change. The result is that
the stored calibration values may no longer accurately
define the input circuit. For most applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years
should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5RT involves a resistance calibration. Allow 30
minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The
following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to
35 °C (59 to 95 °F).
Calibration should only be performed by individuals experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment.
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5RT.
10 OHM RTD Range Calibration
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 10 ohm.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button. Display reads CAL r10.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 00r.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a three wire
link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
6. When the display reads 15.0r, apply a precision resistance of 15 ohms (with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a
three wire link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration, or
proceed to the 100 ohm RTD Range Claibration.
MIN DISPLAY ENABLE
LO-En
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.
MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
LO-t
«
ª
2.0
0.0 to 999.9 sec.
100 OHM RTD Range Calibration
When the Input Display is below the present MIN value for the entered delay
time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MIN reading. A delay
time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
F
FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS
FCS
«
ª
NO
NO
yES
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button until the display reads CAL r100.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0r.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a three wire
link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
6. When the display reads 300.0r, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using
a three wire link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration.
Select YES to perform any of the Factory Service Operations shown below.
RESISTANCE DISPLAY MODE
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
CodE
«
ª
66
Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press SEL button to exit the module.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up
will also load the factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in
the event of a memory failure or corruted data.
508
CodE
«
ª
85
Entering Code 85 will place the CUB5RT in a resistance
display mode. This mode is useful for diagnostic purposes
before and after calibration, or to display the measured
resistance of a connected RTD probe. If the RTD type is set
for Cu427 with the jumper set to the 10 ohm position, the display will read
resistance in 0.000 ohms resolution. For all other RTD types, with the jumper in
the 100 ohm position, the display will read in 0.00 ohms resolution.
Re-entering code 85 toggles the display back to the temperature display mode
without having to remove power from the meter. If power is removed, the
display always returns to the temperature display mode when power is reapplied.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)
PARAMETER MENU
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME
dSP-t «
ª
1
0.5
1
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-LEV
seconds
2
ª
This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.
ª
«
yES
NO
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
ª
The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)
rSt
ª
«
dSP
NO
HI
LO
HI-LO
dSP
This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).
«
ª
NO
yES
«
000
not
P-Loc
______
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
ª
«
rEd
to
999
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (P-Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending on the
code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the CodE prompt
appears (see chart).
NO
The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds.
COLOr
000
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
ScroL
5
to
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.
CodE
yES
1
5
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
SEL
«
Active
0
Full Programming
Immediate Access
1-99
Quick Programming
After Quick
Programming with
correct code entry at
CodE prompt *
100-999
CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *
0
Programming Lock
No Access
1-99
Quick Programming
No Access
100-999
CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *
0-999
Full Programming
Immediate Access
P-Loc
rEd
6rn
Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.
Not Active
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
F
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
1-717-767-6511
509
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU
The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.
SETPOINT VALUE
SPt-n
ª
SETPOINT SELECT
SPSEL
«
ª
NO
NO
SP-1
SETPOINT 2 ENABLE
«
ª
NO
YES
100
-9999 to 99999
Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.
SP-2
Enter the setpoint (output) to be programmed. The n in the following
parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number. After the chosen setpoint
is completely programmed, the display will return to SPSEL. Repeat steps for
each setpoint to be programmed. Select NO to exit the module. The number of
setpoints available is setpoint output card dependent.
Enb-2
«
NO
Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.
HYSTERESIS VALUE
HYS-n
ª
«
1
to
59999
2
Enter desired hysteresis value. See Setpoint Output Figures for visual
explanation of how setpoint output actions (balanced and unbalanced) are
affected by the hysteresis. When the setpoint is a control output, usually
balanced hysteresis is used. For alarm applications, usually unbalanced
hysteresis is used. For unbalanced hysteresis modes, the hysteresis functions on
the low side for high acting setpoints and functions on the high side for low
acting setpoints.
Note: Hysteresis eliminates output chatter at the switch point, while time delay
can be used to prevent false triggering during process transient events.
ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION
Act-n «
ª HI-Ub
LO-bL
HI-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub
Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.
HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub
F
tON-n
«
ª
0.0
0.0
to
599.9 Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning on
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
=
High Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
tOF-n
«
=
Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
ª
0.0
OFF TIME DELAY
0.0
to
599.9 Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning off
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
OUTPUT RESET ACTION
rSt-n
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =
HI-bL
Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =
LO-bL
ª
«
Auto
Auto
LAtCH
L-dLY
Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.
Auto = Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset off
at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.
LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
510
HI-Ub
Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
LO-Ub
the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
When the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the
corresponding “on” output is reset immediately and remains off until the
trigger point is crossed again. (Previously latched alarms will be off if power
up Display Value is lower than setpoint value.)
L-dLY = Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures. Latch
means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST button
or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle. When
the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter
delays the event until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off
point. (Previously latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower
than setpoint value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous L-dLY
reset if it is not activated at power up.)
STANDBY OPERATION
Stb-n
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and OutputReset Action.
PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION
«
brn-n
ª
OFF
OFF
ON
Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(open or short), the output can be programmed to be on or off.
CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE
Setpoint Output Reset Actions
ª
«
NO
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.
OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
rEn-n
ChC-n
YES
YES
This parameter enables the RST button or user input to reset the output when
the display is reset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to dSP and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions are
not met, the output will not reset.
5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
PARAMETER MENU
F
The Serial Setup Parameters are only active when the optional RS232 or RS485 serial communications module is installed in the meter. Refer to the CUB5COM
bulletin for complete details on CUB5 serial communications.
1-717-767-6511
511
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CUB5RT PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.
F
512
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXLTC - PAX LITE THERMOCOUPLE METER
z PROGRAMMABLE TC TYPE (T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N or mV SCALE)
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
z SELECTABLE °F OR °C WITH 0.1 OR 1 DEGREE DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
z STATE-OF-THE-ART DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FOR GREATER
ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY
z FULL 4-DIGIT, HIGH VISIBILITY, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH RED LED
DISPLAY
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL FILTERING ENHANCES STABILITY
z PEAK/VALLEY (HI/LO READING) MEMORY
C
UL
R
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY WITH BACKLIGHT
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Pax Lite Thermocouple Meter accepts inputs from standard
thermocouples and precisely linearizes them. A full 4-digit display
accommodates a wide range of temperature inputs. The unit automatically
compensates for cold junction, NBS linearity and the meter’s zero and span.
The meter features a readout choice of either Fahrenheit or Celsius with 0.1
or 1 degree resolution. English Style display prompts and front panel buttons aid
the operator through set-up and operation. With a few simple steps the unit can
be used as a millivolt meter by selecting “
” for thermocouple type. This
mode is useful in monitoring and displaying the actual voltage produced at the
thermocouple probe junction and as an aid in troubleshooting for a faulty
thermocouple probe.
The meter provides a Peak (HI) and Valley (LO) reading memory with
selectable capture delay time. The capture delay is used to prevent detection of
false Peak or Valley readings that may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. The Peak and Valley readings are stored at power-down to allow
monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days, etc.).
Programmable digital filtering enhances the stability of the reading. All setup data is stored in EEPROM, which will hold data for a minimum of 10 years
without power. The meter has several built-in diagnostic functions to alert
operators of any malfunction.
Extensive testing of noise interference mechanisms and full burn-in makes
the indicator extremely reliable in industrial environments. The front bezel
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for wash down applications.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired. Do not use this unit to directly
command motors, valves, or other actuators not equipped with safeguards. To
do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or equipment in the event of a fault
to the unit.
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) I:
Signal level, special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunication,
electronic, etc. with smaller transient overvoltages than Installation
Category (overvoltage category) II.
F
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) II:
Local level, appliances, portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltages than Installation Category (overvoltage category) III.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.
1-717-767-6511
513
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
3
4
4
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
6
7
8
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers
PAXL
0
0
TC
TC - Thermocouple Temperature Meter
Accessories Part Numbers*
F
TYPE
MODEL NO.
Accessories
PAXLBK
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Units Label Kit Accessory
PAXLBK30
*This meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels. The label kit is only
needed if another units label is desired.
514
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 4-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high LED, minus sign displayed for
negative temperatures.
Overrange/Underrange Input: Flashing “
” or “
”
Overrange/Underrange Display: “ ” or “
”
2. POWER: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply (300 V working
voltage)
3. CONTROLS: Three front panel push buttons for meter set-up. Rear terminal
input for disabling the front panel.
4. THERMOCOUPLE TYPES: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N or mV scale
5. RESOLUTION: 1 degree for all types, or 0.1 degree for T, E, J, K and N only
6. THERMOCOUPLE RANGE AND ACCURACY: All errors include NBS
conformity, cold junction effect and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 60
minutes warm-up. Relative Humidity less than 85%.
TC TYPE
RANGE
ACCURACY
WIRE COLOR
T
-200 to +400ºC
-328 to +752ºF
0.8ºC
1.4ºF
blue
E
-200 to +1000ºC
-328 to +1832ºF
0.8ºC
1.4ºF
purple
J
-200 to +760ºC
-328 to +1400ºF
0.8ºC
1.4ºF
white
K
-200 to +1250ºC
-328 to +2282ºF
0.8ºC
1.4ºF
yellow
R
0 to +1768ºC
+32 to +3214ºF
2.1ºC
3.8ºF
black
S
0 to +1768ºC
+32 to +3214ºF
2.1ºC
3.8ºF
black
B
+150 to +1820ºC
+302 to +3308ºF
2.3ºC
4.1ºF
grey
N
-200 to +1300ºC
-328 to +2372ºF
0.8ºC
1.4ºF
orange
mV
-10.00 to +80.00 mV
0.01%
7. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 20 MΩ, all types
8. LEAD RESISTANCE EFFECT: 20 μV/350 Ω
Max Input Voltage Protection: 70 VDC continuous
9. OPEN THERMOCOUPLE DETECTION: Display Flashes: “
”
10. COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION: Automatic, 0.02 degree/degree.
Disabled for linear mV scale.
11. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/second
12. RESPONSE TIME: 2 seconds to settle for step input (increases with
programmable digital filtering)
13. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 45 dB @ 50/60 Hz (may be improved by
programmable digital filtering)
Common Mode Rejection: 120 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50 °C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80 °C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max (non-condensing) from 0 to
50 °C
Span Drift: 40 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: 1 μV/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/7470A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 03ME09282-08292003
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
16. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. One
piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
17. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
18. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)
F
ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized using
the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.
Each meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels which can be installed into
the meter’s bezel display assembly.
1-717-767-6511
515
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
METER
Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back
of the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT
2.0 WIRING
THE
METER
POWER WIRING
Primary AC power is connected to Terminals 1 and 2. To reduce the chance of
noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the indicator, the AC power should
be relatively “clean” and within the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily
loaded circuits or circuits which also power loads that cycle on and off,
(contactors, relays, motors, machinery, etc.) should be avoided.
PROGRAM DISABLE INPUT WIRING
PGM.DIS. (Terminal 3) is a digital input that is active when connected to
Comm (Terminal 4). Any form of mechanical switch or current sinking logic with
less than 0.7 V saturation may be used. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Follow the EMC Installation Guidelines for shield connection.
AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC
F SIGNAL WIRING (TC SENSOR)
Remove power and connect the negative thermocouple lead (always red) to
TC- (Terminal 6) and the positive lead to TC+ (Terminal 5). Be certain that
connections are clean and tight. If the thermocouple probe is to be mounted
away from the meter, thermocouple extension grade wire must be used (copper
wire will not work). Use the correct type and observe the correct polarity.
Always refer to the sensor manufacturer’s instructions for probe wiring
connections, if available. For multi-probe temperature averaging applications,
two or more thermocouple probes may be connected at the meter. (Always use
the same type.) In order to minimize the chances of coupling noise into the
wires and subsequently causing bouncy and erroneous readings, proper
guidelines for thermocouple wire routing must be followed.
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)
Thermocouple
516
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
3.0 REVIEWING
THE
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
PAR
Access Programming Mode or Display Input Reading
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
S
Display Peak (HI) Reading
Increment value or change selection
T
Display Valley (LO) Reading
Decrement value or change selection
F
PEAK/VALLEY DETECTION
The meter will automatically record the highest input reading (peak) and the
lowest input reading (valley) for later recall. These values are stored at powerdown to allow monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days,
etc.). A selectable capture delay time is used to prevent detection of false peak or
valley readings caused by sudden short spikes or unusual process events.
The peak and valley readings can be viewed and reset using the front panel
keys as described below.
Reset Peak and/or Valley to the current Input reading:
To reset Peak and Valley, press S and T simultaneously.
To reset Peak only, press and hold S then press PAR.
To reset Valley only, press and hold T then press PAR.
In each case, the meter displays
followed by the current Input reading.
View Peak, Valley and Input readings:
To view Peak, press S. Meter displays followed by the Peak reading.
To view Valley, press T. Meter displays followed by the Valley reading.
To view Input, press PAR. Meter displays
followed by the current
Input reading.
Note: The decimal point to the right of digit 1 flashes while the peak or valley
reading is displayed.
1-717-767-6511
517
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
The Thermocouple Meter has up to seven programmable parameters that are
entered in the sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Depending on the thermocouple type selected, some parameters are not
applicable and are bypassed in the sequence.
The last programming step offers the choice of entering calibration mode.
From this mode, the user can restore the meter to factory default settings, or
recalibrate the signal input and cold junction temperature if necessary. To
prevent inadvertent entries, an access code must be keyed-in to perform any
operations in calibration mode.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out using the Program Disable input
terminal. With the PGM.DIS. terminal connected to COMM, the meter displays
“ ” when the PAR key is pressed, and will not enter programming mode.
DECIMAL POINT POSITION
«
ª
Select the decimal point position by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
This sets the display resolution to 1 or 0.1 degree. This parameter is not
available for thermocouple types R, S and B, where the display resolution is
always 1 degree. When mV indicator mode is selected for thermocouple type,
the display resolution is fixed at 0.01 mV (10 μV).
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.
PROGRAMMING MODE TIMEOUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to
the parameter currently being programmed will not be saved.
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
In Programming Mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.
«
to
ª
The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be used
to compensate for probe errors or errors due to variances in probe placement, or
to adjust the readout to a reference thermometer. Set the desired display offset
value by pressing (and/or holding) the up or down arrow keys. When the desired
offset value is displayed, press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to
the next parameter. The display resolution for the offset value is the same as the
decimal point position programmed above. The display offset is not available
when mV indicator mode is selected for thermocouple type.
DIGITAL FILTERING
THERMOCOUPLE TYPE
«
«
ª
ª
SELECTION TC TYPE
F
tc-t
tc-j
SELECTION
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering applied to the input signal.
If the temperature display is difficult to read due to small variations or noise,
increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display. Although the
digital filter features a “moving window” to help minimize response time,
higher levels of filtering will result in slightly longer response times.
TC TYPE
T
S
E
B
J
N
K
mV indicator
R
Select the thermocouple type by pressing the arrow keys ( or ) to sequence
through the selection list. When the desired selection is displayed, press the PAR
key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter. Refer to the
thermocouple range and accuracy specification for additional TC information.
- no digital filtering
- increased filtering
- normal filtering
- maximum filtering
Set the desired level of input filtering by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
PEAK (HI)/ VALLEY (LO) CAPTURE DELAY TIME
TEMPERATURE SCALE
«
ª
«
ª
¶
Select the desired temperature scale by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
This setting does not change the Custom Units Overlay display (if installed).
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
518
seconds
When the Input display is above the present HI value or below the present
LO value for the entered delay time, the meter will capture the Input display as
the new HI or LO reading. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden
short spikes or Input display variations that may occur during start-up.
Set the desired capture delay time by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT
«
«
ª
ª
The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays,
which can be installed in the meter bezel display assembly. The unit of measure
for the meter display is then visible when the label backlight is illuminated. The
two most commonly used temperature unit labels (°F and °C) are supplied with
the meter. Press the up or down arrow keys to select whether the units label
backlight is illuminated. Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance
to the next parameter.
Before exiting Programming Mode, the meter offers the choice of entering
Calibration Mode. To exit Programming Mode without entering Calibration
Mode, select
and press the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and
returns to the normal display mode. All programmed selections are now
transferred to non-volatile memory and are retained if power is removed from
the meter.
(If power loss occurs during Programming Mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)
5.0 CALIBRATING
THE
METER
CALIBRATION MODE
«
ª
COLD JUNCTION TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
to
To enter Calibration Mode, select
<>
at the end of Programming
Mode, and press the PAR key. In Calibration Mode, the user can restore the
meter to factory default settings or recalibrate the signal input if necessary.
To prevent inadvertent entries, an access code must be entered to perform any
operation in Calibration Mode. Upon entering Calibration Mode, the meter
initially displays Code 50. Press the up or down arrow keys to select the access
code for the desired operation. If an access code other than those shown below
is entered, the meter exits Calibration Mode and returns to normal display mode.
FACTORY SETTINGS
1. Connect a calibrated thermocouple (types T, E, J, K or N only) to the panel
meter. Select the thermocouple type used in programming.
2. Connect the reference thermometer to the measuring end of the thermocouple.
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the PAXLTC thermocouple
probe may be placed in a calibration bath of known temperature.)
3. From the normal indicator display mode, compare the display temperature to
that of the reference thermometer. Allow 10 minutes for the temperature to
equalize. The meter and the reference thermometer should agree to within 1° F
(0.6° C).
4. If cold junction re-calibration is necessary (temperature out of tolerance), enter
meter calibration mode and enter access Code 48. The meter display will
alternate between
and the old cold junction reading. At this point, key-in
the new cold junction temperature according to the formula:
WHERE:
«
New Cold Junction Reading = Old Cold Junction Reading + Difference
(Difference = Reference Thermometer Temperature - Meter Display Temperature)
ª
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown in the
previous section in the alternating display illustrations. All programming
parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by entering the access
Code 66 and pressing the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and then
returns to Code 50. This procedure resets only parameters that are accessed
through Programming Mode. The Calibration Mode settings (input calibration
levels) are not affected.
5. Press PAR. The meter briefly displays
junction value.
VOLTAGE CALIBRATION
Following cold junction calibration, the display
<>
/ appears.
Enter
if input voltage calibration is desired. If is entered, the meter exits
calibration and returns to normal display mode.
DISPLAY
PARAMETERS
0.000 mV
30.000 mV
60.000 mV
METER INPUT CALIBRATION
«
ª
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the troubleshooting section before
attempting this procedure. When re-calibration is required (generally every 2
years), the procedure should only be performed by qualified technicians using
appropriate equipment. A precision thermometer (RTD, thermistor or similar
type with an accuracy of ±0.3° C) and an accurate voltage source (0.01%) are
required. The procedure consists of setting the cold junction temperature and
applying accurate voltages to the meter input in a series of three steps. Allow a
60-minute warm-up before starting calibration.
to acknowledge the new cold
F
DESCRIPTION/COMMENT
Apply 0.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.
Apply 30.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.
Apply 60.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.
The meter briefly displays End and returns to the normal display mode.
Calibration is now complete.
It is recommended to check calibration by selecting mV indication mode for
thermocouple type (
< >
) and verifying unit accuracy at various
points over the range of the meter (-10 to +80 mV).
1-717-767-6511
519
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TROUBLESHOOTING
The majority of all problems with the meter can be traced to improper connections or improper programming set-ups. Be sure all connections
are clean and tight and check the programming set-ups for correct data.
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM
NO DISPLAY
“
“
” IN DISPLAY
” or “
” IN DISPLAY
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDIES
1. Power off, improperly connected, or brown-out.
1a. Check wiring.
1b. Verify power.
1. Program data error.
1. Press PAR and check data set-ups.
1. Input display out of range.
1a. Change display resolution to “1” degree.
1b. Reduce offset value.
2a. Check data set-ups.
2b. Check for electrical disturbance.
2c. Disconnect and reconnect power.
2. Loss of data set-ups.
1. Loss of data set-ups.
1a. Check data set-ups.
1b. Disconnect and reconnect power.
1c. Check for electrical disturbance.
1. Electrical “Noise” in process or sensor lines.
2. Process inherently unstable.
3. Corroded or dirty thermocouple wire connections.
1a.
1b.
2.
3.
DISPLAY WANDERS
JITTERY DISPLAY
Increase digital filtering.
Re-route sensor wires.
Dampen process to eliminate oscillations.
Clean and tighten connections.
“
” IN DISPLAY
1. Probe unconnected.
2. Broken or burnout probe.
1. Connect probe.
2. Repair or obtain new probe.
“
” IN DISPLAY
1. Excessive positive probe temperature.
1. Reduce temperature.
“
” IN DISPLAY
1. Excessive negative probe temperature.
1. Increase temperature.
F
520
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXLRT - PAX LITE RTD METER
ACCEPTS STANDARD 3-WIRE 100 Ω RTD SENSORS (ALPHA =
0.00385 or ALPHA = 0.00392)
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
SELECTABLE °F OR °C WITH 0.1 OR 1 DEGREE DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
STATE-OF-THE-ART DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FOR GREATER
ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY
FULL 4-DIGIT, HIGH VISIBILITY, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH RED LED
DISPLAY
PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL FILTERING
C
UL
R
PEAK/VALLEY (HI/LO READING) MEMORY
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
US LISTED
CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY WITH BACKLIGHT
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Pax Lite RTD Meter accepts standard RTD inputs and precisely linearizes
them into temperature readings. A full 4-digit display accommodates a wide
range of temperature inputs. State-of-the-art digital circuitry virtually eliminates
errors due to drift.
The meter features a readout choice of either Fahrenheit or Celsius with 0.1 or
1 degree resolution. English Style display prompts and front panel buttons aid the
operator through set-up and operation. Programmable digital filtering enhances
the stability of the reading. All set-up data is stored in EEPROM, which will hold
data for a minimum of 10 years without power.
The meter provides a Peak (HI) and Valley (LO) reading memory with
selectable capture delay time. The capture delay is used to prevent detection of
false Peak or Valley readings that may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. The Peak and Valley readings are stored at power-down to allow
monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days, etc.).
The meter has several built-in diagnostic functions to alert operators of any
malfunction. Extensive testing of noise interference mechanisms and full burnin makes the meter extremely reliable in industrial environments. The front bezel
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for wash down applications.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired. Do not use this unit to directly
command motors, valves, or other actuators not equipped with safeguards. To
do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or equipment in the event of a fault
to the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) I:
Signal level, special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunication,
electronic, etc. with smaller transient overvoltages than Installation
Category (overvoltage category) II.
F
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) II:
Local level, appliances, portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltages than Installation Category (overvoltage category) III.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.
1-717-767-6511
521
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
3
4
4
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
6
7
7
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers
PAXL
RT
0
0
RT - RTD Temperature Meter
Accessories Part Numbers*
F
TYPE
MODEL NO.
Accessories
PAXLBK
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Units Label Kit Accessory
PAXLBK30
*This meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels. The label kit is only
needed if another units label is desired.
522
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 4-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high LED, minus sign displayed for
negative temperatures.
Overrange/Underrange Input: Flashing “
” or “
”
Overrange/Underrange Display: “ ” or “
”
2. POWER: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply (300 V working
voltage)
3. CONTROLS: Three front panel push buttons for meter set-up. Rear terminal
input for disabling the front panel.
4. RESOLUTION: 0.1 or 1 degree
5. RANGE: Decimal Point Dependent
0.1° res: -199.9° to 850.0 °C (-199.9° to 999.9 °F);
1° res: -200° to 850 °C (-328° to 1562 °F)
6. OPEN/SHORTED RTD DETECTION: Display flashes: “
” or “
”
7. LEAD RESISTANCE EFFECT: 20 Ω max., 2.5 °C/Ω error for V exc. and
common lead unbalance
8. ACCURACY: 0.3 °C, @ 23 °C and 30 min. warm-up
9. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/second
10. RESPONSE TIME: 2 seconds to settle for step input (increases with
programmable digital filtering)
11. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (may be improved by
programmable digital filtering)
Common Mode Rejection: 120 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010-1, CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50 °C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80 °C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max (non-condensing) from 0 to
50 °C
Span Drift: 50 ppm/ °C
Zero Drift: 0.001 °C/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
14. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. One
piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
16. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)
F
ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized using
the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.
Each meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels which can be installed into
the meter’s bezel display assembly.
1-717-767-6511
523
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
METER
Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back
of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the
unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT
2.0 WIRING
THE
METER
POWER WIRING
Primary AC power is connected to Terminals 1 and 2. To reduce the chance of
noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the indicator, the AC power should
be relatively “clean” and within the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily
loaded circuits or circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off (contactors,
relays, motors, machinery, etc.) should be avoided.
PROGRAM DISABLE INPUT WIRING
PGM.DIS. (Terminal 3) is a digital input that is active when connected to RTD(Terminal 6). Any form of mechanical switch or current sinking logic with less
than 0.7 V saturation may be used. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Follow the EMC Installation Guidelines for shield connection.
AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC
SIGNAL WIRING (RTD SENSOR)
F
RTD sensors are used in applications where a high degree of accuracy is
required. Most RTD sensors available are the 3-wire type. The 3rd additional
wire is a sense lead for canceling the effects of lead resistance at the probe. The
sense lead connects to Terminal 5 (RTD+), the common lead to Terminal 6
(RTD-), and the excitation lead to Terminal 4 (+ Excitation). The excitation and
sense leads are generally the same color because they are functionally the same
and may be interchanged at the meter. Four wire sensors have an additional
sense lead connected (at the probe) to the common lead. Leave the extra sense
lead disconnected when using a four wire probe with the PAXLRT meter.
Always refer to the sensor manufacturer’s instructions for probe wiring
connections, if available. Two wire RTD sensors may be used with the PAXLRT
by shorting Terminal 4 to Terminal 5, if the distance between sensor and meter
is less than 30 feet. The total lead resistance can be used to predict the
temperature error for 2-wire sensors, according to 2.5°C/Ω of lead resistance.
Note: Extended cable runs can be made provided the lead resistance is less
than 20 Ω/lead and the resistance is equal in each lead.
3-Wire RTD
524
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)
2-Wire RTD
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3.0 REVIEWING
THE
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
PAR
Access Programming Mode or Display Input Reading
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
S
Display Peak (HI) Reading
Increment value or change selection
T
Display Valley (LO) Reading
Decrement value or change selection
PEAK/VALLEY DETECTION
The meter will automatically record the highest input reading (peak) and the
lowest input reading (valley) for later recall. These values are stored at powerdown to allow monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days,
etc.). A selectable capture delay time is used to prevent detection of false peak or
valley readings caused by sudden short spikes or unusual process events.
The peak and valley readings can be viewed and reset using the front panel
keys as described below.
F
Reset Peak and/or Valley to the current Input reading:
To reset Peak and Valley, press S and T simultaneously.
To reset Peak only, press and hold S then press PAR.
To reset Valley only, press and hold T then press PAR.
In each case, the meter displays
followed by the current Input reading.
View Peak, Valley and Input readings:
To view Peak, press S. Meter displays followed by the Peak reading.
To view Valley, press T. Meter displays followed by the Valley reading.
To view Input, press PAR. Meter displays
followed by the current
Input reading.
Note: The decimal point to the right of digit 1 flashes while the peak or valley
reading is displayed.
1-717-767-6511
525
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
The RTD Meter has seven programmable parameters that are entered in the
sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
The last programming step offers the choice of entering calibration mode.
From this mode, the user can restore the meter to factory default settings or
recalibrate the signal input if necessary. To prevent inadvertent entries, an access
code must be keyed-in to perform any operations in calibration mode.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out using the Program Disable input
terminal. With the PGM.DIS. terminal connected to RTD-, the meter displays
“ ” when the PAR key is pressed, and will not enter programming mode.
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
DIGITAL FILTERING
«
ª
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering
applied to the input signal. If the temperature display is difficult to read due to
small variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the
display. Although the digital filter features a “moving window” to help minimize
response time, higher levels of filtering will result in slightly longer response
times.
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.
PROGRAMMING MODE TIMEOUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic timeout feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to
the parameter currently being programmed will not be saved.
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
In Programming Mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.
RTD TYPE
«
TEMPERATURE SCALE
«
¶
Select the desired temperature scale by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
This setting does not change the Custom Units Overlay display (if installed).
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
PEAK (HI)/ VALLEY (LO) CAPTURE DELAY TIME
«
«
When the Input display is above the present HI value or below the present LO
value for the entered delay time, the meter will capture the Input display as the
new HI or LO reading. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short
spikes or Input display variations that may occur during start-up.
Set the desired capture delay time by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
«
ª
The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays,
which can be installed in the meter bezel display assembly. The unit of measure
for the meter display is then visible when the label backlight is illuminated. The
two most commonly used temperature unit labels (°F and °C) are supplied with
the meter. Press the up or down arrow keys to select whether the units label
backlight is illuminated. Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to
the next parameter.
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT
«
ª
0
Select the decimal point position by pressing the up or down arrow keys. This
sets the display resolution to 1 or 0.1 degree. Press the PAR key to save the
selection and advance to the next parameter.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET
«
seconds
ª
DECIMAL POINT POSITION
ª
- maximum filtering
UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT
Select the RTD type by pressing the up or down arrow keys ( or ). When
the desired selection is displayed, press the PAR key to save the selection and
advance to the next parameter.
F
- increased filtering
- normal filtering
Set the desired level of input filtering by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.
ª
ª
- no digital filtering
to
Before exiting Programming Mode, The meter offers the choice of entering
Calibration Mode. To exit Programming Mode without entering Calibration
Mode, select
and press the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and
returns to the normal display mode. All programmed selections are now
transferred to non-volatile memory and are retained if power is removed from
the meter.
(If power loss occurs during Programming Mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)
ª
The temperature display can be corrected with an offset
value. This can be used to compensate for probe errors or errors due to variances
in probe placement, or to adjust the readout to a reference thermometer. Set the
desired display offset value by pressing (and/or holding) the up or down arrow
keys. When the desired offset value is displayed, press the PAR key to save the
selection and advance to the next parameter. The display resolution for the offset
value is the same as the decimal point position programmed above.
526
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.0 CALIBRATING
THE
METER
CALIBRATION MODE
«
METER INPUT CALIBRATION
«
to
ª
ª
To enter Calibration Mode, select
<>
at the end of Programming
Mode, and press the PAR key. In Calibration Mode, the user can restore the
meter to factory default settings or recalibrate the signal input if necessary.
To prevent inadvertent entries, an access code must be entered to perform any
operation in Calibration Mode. Upon entering Calibration Mode, the meter
initially displays Code 50. Press the up or down arrow keys to select the access
code for the desired operation. If an access code other than those shown below
is entered, the meter exits Calibration Mode and returns to normal display mode.
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the troubleshooting section
before attempting this procedure. When re-calibration is required (generally
every 2 years), the procedure should only be performed by qualified
technicians using appropriate equipment. Resistance source accuracies of
0.02% or better are required.
The procedure consists of applying accurate signal levels to the meter input
in a series of two steps. Allow a 30-minute warm-up period before starting
calibration. To begin the input calibration, enter access Code 48 and press the
PAR key.
FACTORY SETTINGS
«
ª
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown in the
previous section in the alternating display illustrations. All programming
parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by entering the access
Code 66 and pressing the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and then
returns to Code 50. This procedure resets only parameters that are accessed
through Programming Mode. The Calibration Mode settings (input calibration
levels) are not affected.
ENTER ZERO REFERENCE
Meter displays . Apply 0 ohms to the meter input by shorting Terminals 4,
5, and 6. Allow the meter to stabilize at least 20 seconds after shorting the
terminals, and then press PAR.
APPLY PRECISION RESISTANCE
Meter displays
. Connect a precision 300 ohm resistor across Terminals
5 and 6. Terminals 4 and 5 remain shorted. (Note: Be certain to short Terminals
4 and 5 at the resistor as shown in the drawing below. Shorting terminals may
lead to incorrect calibration.)
Allow the meter to stabilize at least 20 seconds after making the connections,
and then press PAR. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. Calibration is now complete. It is recommended to check
calibration by comparing the displayed temperature with a precision thermometer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The majority of all problems with the meter can be traced to improper connections or improper programming set-ups. Be sure all connections are
clean and tight and check the programming set-ups for correct data.
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDIES
NO DISPLAY
1. Power off, improperly connected, or brown-out.
1a. Check wiring.
1b. Verify power.
1. Program data error.
1. Press PAR and check data set-ups.
1. Input display out of range.
1a. Change display resolution to “1” degree.
1b. Reduce offset value.
2a. Check data set-ups.
2b. Check for electrical disturbance.
2c. Disconnect and reconnect power.
“
“
” IN DISPLAY
” or “
” IN DISPLAY
2. Loss of data set-ups.
DISPLAY WANDERS
1. Loss of data set-ups.
1a. Check data set-ups.
1b. Disconnect and reconnect power.
1c. Check for electrical disturbance.
JITTERY DISPLAY
1. Electrical “Noise” in process or sensor lines.
2. Process inherently unstable.
1a. Increase digital filtering.
1b. Re-route signal wires.
2. Dampen process to eliminate oscillations.
“
” IN DISPLAY
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
“
” IN DISPLAY
1. Input shorted.
Probe unconnencted.
Broken or burnout probe.
Excessive probe temperature.
Input overload.
F
Connect probe.
Repair or obtain new probe.
Reduce temperature.
Check input levels.
1. Check input connections.
1-717-767-6511
527
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXLT - PAX LITE TEMPERATURE METER
z 5 DIGIT, 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
z DISPLAYS °C OR °F WITH 1° OR 0.1° RESOLUTION
z BACKLIGHT OVERLAYS INCLUDED (°C AND °F)
z MAX AND MIN READING MEMORY
z TC COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (ON/OFF)
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAYS
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
F
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SUMMARY
The PAXLT is a versatile meter that accepts a variety of thermocouple and
RTD inputs and provides a temperature display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. The
readout conforms to ITS-90 standards, with 1° or 0.1° resolution. The 5-digit
display has 0.56" high digits with adjustable intensity. Backlight overlay labels
for °F and °C are included.
The meter features a Maximum and Minimum reading memory, with
programmable capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of
false max or min readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. Either value can be displayed if desired. The display can be toggled
manually or automatically between the selected values.
Other features include thermocouple cold junction compensation, display
offset and a programmable user input to perform a variety of meter control
functions. Two setpoint outputs are provided, each with a Form C relay. Output
modes and setup options are fully programmable to suit a variety of control
requirements.
The PAXLT can be universally powered from a wide range of AC or DC
voltage. The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial
environments. With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet
CE requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to
it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
PAXLT
DESCRIPTION
TC/RTD Temperature Meter with dual Relay Output
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
528
PART NUMBER
PAXLT000
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 12 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 6 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50 VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
3. READOUT:
Display Range: -19999 to 99999
Scale: °F or °C
Resolution: 1° or 0.1°
Response Time: 500 msec min.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: "….." / "-…."
Input Overrange/Underrange Indication:
/
4. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 VDC
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Failed Sensor Indication:
TC TYPE
T
E
J
K
R
S
B
ACCURACY
@ 23°C
±°C *
RANGE
-200 to 400°C
2.3
-328 to 752°F
-200 to 871°C
2.7
-328 to 1600°F
-200 to 760°C
1.9
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to 1372°C
2.3
-328 to 2502°F
-50 to 1768°C
4.5
-58 to 3214°F
-50 to 1768°C
4.5
-58 to 3214°F
200 to 1820°C 9.1<540°C
392 to 3308°F 4.5>540°C
-200 to 1300°C
-328 to 2372°F
C
0 to 2315°C
(W5/W26) 32 to 4199°F
2.8
N
mV
-10.00 to 65.00
1.9
0.02 mV
ACCURACY
@ 0 to 50°C
±°C *
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
(+) blue
(-) red
(+) purple
4.9
(-) red
(+) white
4.3
(-) red
(+) yellow
5.8
(-) red
no
15.0
standard
no
15.0
standard
42.6<540°C no
15.0>540°C standard
(+) orange
8.1
(-) red
no
6.1
standard
no
0.08 mV
standard
5.8
BS 1843
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) yellow
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
no
standard
(+) orange
(-) blue
no
standard
no
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to
85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and cold junction tracking effects.
The specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization
conformity, and thermocouple cold junction compensation. Total system
accuracy is the sum of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by
field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
5. RTD INPUTS:
Type: 2, 3 or 4 wire
Excitation Current:
100 ohm range: 165 μA; 10 ohm range: 2.5 mA
Lead Resistance:
100 ohm range: 10 Ω/lead max.; 10 ohm range: 3 Ω/lead max.
Balanced Lead Resistance: Automatically compensated up to max per lead
Unbalanced Lead Resistance: Uncompensated
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 VDC
Failed Sensor Indication:
or
RTD TYPE
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00392
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427
RANGE
ACCURACY*
@ 23°C
ACCURACY*
@0 to 50°C
STANDARD
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
IEC 751
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
-80 to 260°C
0.2°C
0.5°C
-100 to 260°C
0.4°C
0.9°C
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to
85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco effects.
The specification includes the A/D conversion errors and linearization
conformity. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter and probe errors.
Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the
temperature of interest.
6. USER INPUT: Programmable input
Software selectable for active logic state: active low, pull-up (24.7 KΩ to +5
VDC) or active high, pull-down resistor (20 KΩ).
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 10 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
max/min values when power is removed.
8. OUTPUTS:
Type: Dual Form C contacts
Isolation to Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8
H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads.
Response Time: Turn On or Off: 4 msec max.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use. IP20
Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Consult Factory.
13. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
METER
Installation
The PAX Lite meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.
The unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel
cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot
possible. To achieve a proper seal, tighten
the latch screws evenly until the unit
is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]).
Do not over-tighten the screws.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
1-717-767-6511
F
PANEL CUT-OUT
529
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2.0 SETTING
THE
JUMPER
FRONT DISPLAY
INPUT RANGE JUMPER (RTD ONLY)
This jumper is used to select the proper input range for the RTD probe being
used (10 ohm or 100 ohm). For thermocouple inputs, this jumper has no effect
and can be left in either position.
To access the jumper, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start on the other side latch.
Main
Circuit
Board
10 OHM
100 OHM
RTD RANGE
JUMPER
REAR TERMINALS
3.0 WIRING
THE
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
F
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be properly connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
530
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.1 POWER WIRING
Power
Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC -
3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
CAUTION: Sensor input common (Terminal 7) is NOT isolated from user common (Terminal 9). In order to preserve the safety
of the meter application, the sensor input common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages;
or input common and user common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous live voltage may be
present at the user input and user common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of the
sensor input common and the user common with respect to earth ground.
THERMOCOUPLE
3.3 USER INPUT WIRING
Terminal 8: User Input
Terminal 9: User Common
Current Sinking (Active Low Logic)
2-WIRE RTD
3-WIRE RTD
3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
Terminal 10: NC 1
Terminal 11: NO 1
Terminal 12: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 13: NC 2
Terminal 14: NO 2
Terminal 15: Relay 2 Common
F
Current Sourcing (Active High Logic)
1-717-767-6511
531
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
BUTTON DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
AND
DISPLAY
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
PAR
Access Programming Mode
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
SEL
Index display through enabled values
Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value
RST
Resets values (min/max) or outputs
Increment selected digit of parameter value
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“SP1” - Indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“SP2” - Indicates setpoint 2 output activated.
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value
Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.
5.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
F
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR BUTTON)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR BUTTON)
It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR button. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a
security code or a hardware lock.
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR button with
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & PAR BUTTONS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module in
sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input
or programming security code.
The Programming Menu is organized into four modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
Pro and the present module. The SEL button is used to select the desired module.
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR button.
MODULE MENU (PAR BUTTON)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR button is pressed to advance to a particular
parameter to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding
parameters. After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO.
Programming may continue by accessing additional modules.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
PROGRAMMING TIPS
FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The SEL and RST buttons are used to
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR button,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to
the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially
the right most digit). Pressing the RST button increments the digit by one or the
user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically scroll. The SEL
button will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR button will enter the
value and move to the next parameter.
532
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
«
Parameter
ª
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
INPUT TYPE
«
ª
SELECTION INPUT TYPE
SELECTION
INPUT TYPE
T
N
E
C
J
mV
K
Platinum 385 100 Ω
R
Platinum 392 100 Ω
S
Nickel 672 100 Ω
B
Copper 427 10 Ω
Select the thermocouple or RTD type used for the application. For RTDs,
position the Input Range Jumper to match the RTD type (10Ω or 100Ω).
Selecting
displays a millivolt signal readout with 10 μV resolution.
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION
«
ª
Software filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading
with a fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.
FILTER BAND
«
to
ª
display units
The filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the variation
exceeds the input filter band value, the filter disengages. When the variation
becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This allows for a
stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large process
change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of the Display
Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the filter permanently
engaged at the filter level selected above.
This parameter enables or disables internal cold junction compensation for
thermocouples. For most applications, cold junction compensation should be
enabled ( ). This parameter only appears for thermocouple input selections.
USER INPUT FUNCTION
«
TEMPERATURE SCALE
ª
«
DISPLAY MODE
ª
DESCRIPTION
No Function
Select the desired temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input,
MAX and MIN displays. This parameter does not appear when mV or RTD
resistance display is enabled.
Program Mode Lock-out
Reset *
User Input disabled.
See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Reset the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.
Display Hold
Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).
Display Select *
Advance once for each activation.
ª
Display Intensity Level *
Increase intensity one level for each
activation.
Set the decimal point for the desired display resolution. This selection applies
for the Input, MAX and MIN displays, and also affects the Setpoint and Display
Offset values. For mV or RTD resistance displays, the decimal point location is
fixed and this parameter does not appear.
Setpoint 1 Reset *
Reset setpoint 1 output.
Setpoint 2 Reset *
Reset setpoint 2 output.
Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset *
Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT
«
* Indicates Edge Triggered function. All others are Level Active functions.
DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE
«
ª
F
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
«
to
The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be
used to compensate for probe errors, errors due to variances in probe placement
or adjusting the readout to a reference thermometer.
ª
Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset or display hold is selected
in the User Input Function menu.
FILTER SETTING
USER INPUT ACTIVE LEVEL
«
«
ª
If the displayed temperature is difficult to read due to small process
variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display.
ª
Select whether the user input is configured as active low or active high.
1-717-767-6511
533
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
TOGGLE RTD INPUT DISPLAY MODE
MAX DISPLAY ENABLE
«
«
Entering Code 85 toggles the selected RTD input display
mode between a temperature or resistance readout. The
resistance readout is useful for diagnostic purposes before
and after calibration, or to display the measured resistance
of a connected RTD probe.
For RTD type
(Input Range Jumper in 10Ω position), resistance is
displayed in
ohms resolution. For all other RTD types (100Ω position),
resistance is displayed in
ohms resolution.
Upon entering Code 85, the meter displays either
or
to indicate
temperature or resistance readout selected. The display then returns to
.
Press the PAR button to exit the module.
ª
ª
Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.
MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
«
ª
to
sec.
When the Input Display is above the present MAX value for the entered
delay time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MAX reading.
A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
ª
«
ª
Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.
MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
ª
to
sec.
When the Input Display is below the present MIN value for the entered delay
time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MIN reading. A delay
time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS
F
«
ª
Select
to perform any of the Factory Service Operations shown below.
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
«
ª
ª
534
10 OHM RTD Range Calibration
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 10 ohm position.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL to select 10 ohm range. Display reads
.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals RTD (4), TC (6) and COMM (7) using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, apply a precision resistance of 15 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals RTD, TC and COMM using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode.
100 OHM RTD Range Calibration
Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display
and then
return to
. Press the PAR button to exit the module
VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY
«
«
The PAXLT uses stored calibration values to provide
accurate temperature measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter could slowly change, with the result being that the
stored calibration values may no longer accurately define the input circuit. For
most applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration for thermocouple inputs involves a voltage calibration and a cold
junction calibration. It is recommended that both calibrations be performed. The
voltage calibration must precede cold junction calibration.
Calibration of the meter should only be performed by persons experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment. Allow a minimum 30 minute warm up before
performing any calibration procedures. The following procedures should be
performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C (59 to 95°F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the meter.
MIN DISPLAY ENABLE
«
CALIBRATION
Entering Code 50 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to
. Press the PAR
button to exit the module.
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm position.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL twice to select 100 ohm range. Display reads
.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals RTD (4), TC (6) and COMM (7) using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals RTD, TC and COMM using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
THERMOCOUPLE Voltage Calibration
1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the TC and COMM terminals. Set the voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL until the display reads
to select thermocouple input.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. With the voltage source set to zero, press PAR. Display reads
for about
6 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, set the voltage source output to 60.000 mV.
Press PAR. Display reads
for about 6 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode. Proceed to Cold Junction Calibration.
THERMOCOUPLE Cold Junction Calibration
1. The ambient temperature must be between 20°C and 30°C.
2. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
3. Enter programming mode and verify the following settings in Module 1:
= thermocouple type connected to the meter
= ;
= ;
= ;
=
5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
4. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath of known temperature
could be used in place of the thermometer.)
5. Compare the unit display with the reference temperature indicator (or
calibration bath). If a difference of more than +/- 1.0°C exists, note the
difference (CJ Error) and continue with cold junction calibration.
CJ Error = Reference Temperature - Unit Display
6. Enter programming mode and proceed through Module 2 to the Service
Access Code. Select
and press PAR. Unit displays
. Press
RST to select
.
7. Press PAR. Display reads
followed by the current cold junction value.
Calculate a new cold junction value as follows:
New cold junction = Current cold junction + CJ Error (noted above)
8. Press PAR and set the display to the new cold junction value. Press PAR to
enter the new value. Display reads
for 6 seconds and returns to
.
9. Press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to the normal display mode.
Verify the input reading is correct. If not, repeat steps 5 through 9.
FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME
«
ª
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
«
seconds
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.
This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
«
«
ª
The
to
ª
to
ª
selection allows the SEL key to toggle through the enabled displays.
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)
«
ª
This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
«
ª
The
selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (
) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
user selected values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Entering a Security Code from 1-99 enables Quick Programming mode, and
displays a sublist to select which values appear in the Quick Programming
menu. Values set to
in the sublist are accessible in Quick Programming.
These values include the Setpoints (
,
) and Display Intensity (
).
Programming any Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the
prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Quick
Programming mode, if enabled, is accessed before the
prompt appears.
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “PAR”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED
not
______
UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT
«
ª
Active
The PAXLT includes two units overlay labels (°C and °F) which can be
installed into the meter's bezel display assembly. The backlight for the units
label is activated by this parameter.
0
Full Programming
1-99
Quick Programming
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
Immediate Access
After Quick Programming
1-99
Quick Programming with correct code entry
prompt *
at
With correct code entry
100-999
prompt
prompt *
at
0
Programming Lock
No Access
100-999
Not Active
F
0-999
prompt
Full Programming
No Access
With correct code entry
prompt *
at
Immediate Access
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
1-717-767-6511
535
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
SETPOINT VALUE
SETPOINT SELECT
«
«
to
ª
ª
Select the Setpoint Output to be programmed, starting with Setpoint 1. The
“ ” in the following parameters reflects the chosen Setpoint number. After the
selected setpoint is completely programmed, the display returns to
.
Repeat steps for Setpoint 2 if both Setpoints are being used. Select
to exit the
Setpoint programming module.
Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.
HYSTERESIS VALUE
«
ª
SETPOINT ENABLE
«
ª
Select
to enable Setpoint and access the setup parameters. If
selected, the unit returns to
and Setpoint is disabled.
is
SETPOINT ACTION
Enter desired hysteresis value. See Setpoint Output Figures for visual
explanation of how setpoint output actions (balanced and unbalanced) are
affected by the hysteresis. When the setpoint is a control output, usually
balanced hysteresis is used. For alarm applications, usually unbalanced
hysteresis is used. For unbalanced hysteresis modes, the hysteresis functions on
the low side for high acting setpoints and functions on the high side for low
acting setpoints.
Note: Hysteresis eliminates output chatter at the switch point, while time delay
can be used to prevent false triggering during process transient events.
«
ª
ON TIME DELAY
Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.
F
to
=
High Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis
=
High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
=
Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis
«
ª
to
Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning on
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
OFF TIME DELAY
«
ª
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =
Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =
to
Sec
Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning off
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.
OUTPUT RESET ACTION
«
ª
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
536
Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.
= Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset
off at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
= Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input
or RST button is activated (momentary action), the corresponding “on” output
is reset immediately and remains off until the trigger point is crossed again.
(Previously latched alarms will be off if power up Display Value is lower than
setpoint value.)
= Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input
or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter delays the event
until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off point. (Previously
latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower than setpoint
value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous
reset if it is
not activated at power up.)
OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
«
ª
This parameter enables the RST button or user input to reset the output when
the display is reset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to
and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions
are not met, the output will not reset.
STANDBY OPERATION
«
ª
When
, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.
PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION
«
ª
Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(TC open; RTD open or short), the output can be programmed to be on or off.
Setpoint Output Reset Actions
F
1-717-767-6511
537
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PAXLT PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.
F
538
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL DP5T - THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUT
This is a brief overview of the DP5T. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
DP5 Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 358.
THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR
5-DIGIT 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUT
9 DIGIT TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) WITH BATCHING
UL
C
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
DP5T SPECIFICATIONS
READOUT:
Resolution: Variable: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1, 2, or 5 degree
Scale: F or C
Offset Range: -19,999 to 99,999 display units
THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.03 μV/ohm
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 V
INPUT
TYPE
RANGE
ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)
T
-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C
1.2°C
**
2.1°C
E
-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C
1.0°C
**
2.4°C
J
-200 to 760°C
1.1°C
2.3°C
K
-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C
1.3°C
**
3.4°C
R
-50 to 1768°C
1.9°C
S
-50 to 1768°C
B
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
BS 1843
ITS-90
(+) blue
(-) red
(+) white
(-) blue
ITS-90
(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue
ITS-90
(+) white
(-) red
ITS-90
(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue
4.0°C
ITS-90
no
standard
(+) white
(-) blue
1.9°C
4.0°C
ITS-90
no
standard
(+) white
(-) blue
100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C
3.9°C
2.8°C
5.7°C
4.4°C
ITS-90
no
standard
no
standard
N
-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C
1.3°C
**
3.1°C
ITS-90
(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue
C
(W5/W26)
0 to 2315°C
1.9°C
6.1°C
ASTM no
E988-90*** standard
(+) yellow
(-) blue
no
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an
18 to 28°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and ice point tracking effects. The
specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity, and
thermocouple ice point compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter
and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout
at the temperature of interest.
** The accuracy over the interval -270 to -200°C is a function of temperature,
ranging from 1°C at -200°C and degrading to 7°C at -270°C. Accuracy may be
improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
*** These curves have been corrected to ITS-90.
RTD INPUTS:
Type: 3 or 4 wire, 2 wire can be compensated for lead wire resistance
Excitation current: 100 ohm range: 165 μA
10 ohm range: 2.6 mA
Lead resistance: 100 ohm range: 10 ohm/lead max.
10 ohm range: 3 ohms/lead max.
Max. continuous overload: 30 V
INPUT TYPE
RANGE
100 ohm Pt
-200 to 850°C
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
-200 to 850°C
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
-80 to 260°C
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
-100 to 260°C
alpha = .00427
ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)
0.4°C
1.6°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
0.2°C
0.5°C
0.4°C
0.9°C
STANDARD
***
IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard
DIRECT READOUT:
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE
RANGE
ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)
Direct
mV range
Direct
100 ohm range
Direct
10 ohm range
-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)
0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω
0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω
1-717-767-6511
F
539
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXT - THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUT
This is a brief overview of the PAXT. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 378.
THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
CUSTOM SCALING FOR NON-STANDARD PROBES
TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR
5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
UL
C
R
OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)
US LISTED
COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)
CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
PAXT SPECIFICATIONS
READOUT:
Resolution: Variable: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1, 2, or 5 degrees
Scale: F or C
Offset Range: -19,999 to 99,999 display units
THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.03 μV/ohm
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 V
F
INPUT
TYPE
RANGE
ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)
T
-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C
1.2°C
**
2.1°C
E
-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C
1.0°C
**
2.4°C
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
BS 1843
ITS-90
(+) blue
(-) red
(+) white
(-) blue
ITS-90
(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue
ITS-90
(+) white
(-) red
ITS-90
(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue
(+) yellow
(-) blue
J
-200 to 760°C
1.1°C
2.3°C
K
-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C
1.3°C
**
3.4°C
R
-50 to 1768°C
1.9°C
4.0°C
ITS-90
no
standard
(+) white
(-) blue
S
-50 to 1768°C
1.9°C
4.0°C
ITS-90
no
standard
(+) white
(-) blue
B
100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C
3.9°C
2.8°C
5.7°C
4.4°C
ITS-90
no
standard
no
standard
N
-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C
1.3°C
**
3.1°C
ITS-90
(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue
C
(W5/W26)
0 to 2315°C
1.9°C
6.1°C
ASTM no
E988-90*** standard
no
standard
*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an
18 to 28°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and ice point tracking effects. The
specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity, and
thermocouple ice point compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter
and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout
at the temperature of interest.
** The accuracy over the interval -270 to -200°C is a function of temperature,
ranging from 1°C at -200°C and degrading to 7°C at -270°C. Accuracy may be
improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
*** These curves have been corrected to ITS-90.
540
RTD INPUTS:
Type: 3 or 4 wire, 2 wire can be compensated for lead wire resistance
Excitation current: 100 ohm range: 165 μA
10 ohm range: 2.6 mA
Lead resistance: 100 ohm range: 10 ohm/lead max.
10 ohm range: 3 ohms/lead max.
Max. continuous overload: 30 V
INPUT TYPE
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427
RANGE
ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
-200 to 850°C
0.4°C
1.6°C
-80 to 260°C
0.2°C
0.5°C
-100 to 260°C
0.4°C
0.9°C
STANDARD
***
IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard
CUSTOM RANGE: Up to 16 data point pairs
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE
RANGE
ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°°C)
ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°°C)
Custom
mV range
Custom
100 ohm range
Custom
10 ohm range
-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)
0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω
0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODELS T16 & P16 - TEMPERATURE/PROCESS CONTROLLERS
z PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
z T16 ACCEPTS TC AND RTD
z P16 ACCEPTS 0-10 V AND 0/4-20 mA SIGNALS
z ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
z DC ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)
z USER PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION BUTTON
z PC OR FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
z PC CONFIGURABLE WITH TP16KIT
UL Recognized Component,
File #E156876
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PC PROGRAMMING KIT
The Model T16 Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature
sensors (thermocouple or RTD), while the Model P16 Controller accepts either a
0 to 10 VDC or 0/4 to 20 mA DC input signal. Both controllers can provide an
accurate output control signal (time proportional or DC Analog Output) to
maintain a process at a setpoint value. Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the
process/temperature and setpoint simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform
the operator of the controller and output status. The comprehensive programming
allows these controllers to meet a wide variety of application requirements.
The optional TP16KIT contains a programming module with a 9 pin RS232
connector, cable and Crimson, a Windows® based configuration software. The
software allows downloading, uploading and storage of T16 and P16 program
files. All controllers have a communications port that allows configuration by
PC even without controller power connected. Controller calibration is also
possible using the software when the proper calibration equipment and
controller power is connected.
MAIN CONTROL
CONSTRUCTION
The controller operates in the PID Control Mode for both heating and
cooling, with on-demand auto-tune, that establishes the tuning constants. The
PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned through the front panel and then locked
out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, that allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. Switching to Manual Mode provides the operator direct control of the
output. The controller may also be programmed to operate in On/Off mode with
adjustable hysteresis.
The controller is constructed of a lightweight, high impact, black plastic
textured case and bezel with a clear display window. The front panel meets
NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly installed. In applications that do
not require protection to NEMA 4X, multiple controllers can be stacked
horizontally or vertically. Modern surface-mount technology, extensive testing,
plus high immunity to noise interference makes the controller extremely reliable
in industrial environments.
SAFETY SUMMARY
ALARMS
Optional alarm(s) can be configured independently for absolute high or low
acting with balanced or unbalanced hysteresis. They can also be configured for
deviation and band alarm. In these modes, the alarm trigger values track the
setpoint value. Adjustable alarm hysteresis can be used for delaying output
response. The alarms can be programmed for Automatic or Latching operation.
A selectable standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up until the
temperature stabilizes outside the alarm region.
ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the controller to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.
F
The optional DC Analog Output (10 V or 20 mA) can be configured and
scaled for control or re-transmission purposes. The programmable output update
time reduces valve or actuator activity.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT
1-717-767-6511
541
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2 Line by 4-digit, LCD negative image transmissive with
backlighting.
Top (Process) Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high digits with red backlighting.
Bottom (Parameter) Display: 0.2" (5.1 mm) high digits with green
backlighting.
2. ANNUNCIATORS:
Status Annunciators:
O1 - Main control output is active.
O2 - Cooling output is active (when Alarm 2 is used for cooling).
A1 - Alarm 1 output is active.
A2 - Alarm 2 output is active.
°F, °C - Temperature units.
%PW - Output power percentage is shown in Bottom display.
MAN - Controller is in Manual Mode.
R - Ramping Setpoint indicator.
% - Percent indicator (P16 models only).
Display Messages:
OLOL - Measurement exceeds + sensor range
ULUL - Measurement exceeds - sensor range
OPEN - Open sensor is detected (T16 only)
SHrt - Shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
SENS - Measurement exceeds controller limits (P16 only)
dddd - Display value exceeds + display range
-ddd - Display value exceeds - display range
3. POWER:
Line Voltage Models:
85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8 VA
Low Voltage Models:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC, 4 W
AC Power: 24 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 7 VA
4. CONTROLS: Three rubber push buttons for modification and setup of
controller parameters. One additional button (F1) for user programmable
function. One external user input (models with alarms) for parameter lockout
or other user programmable functions.
5. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters.
6. ISOLATION LEVEL:
AC power with respect to all other I/O: 250 V working (2300 V for 1 min.)
Sensor input to analog output: 50 V working (500 V for 1 minute)
Relay contacts to all other I/O: 300 V working (2300 V for 1 minute)
DC power with respect to sensor input and analog output: 50 V working
(500 V for 1 minute)
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to US and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
F
1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec (10 Hz rate)
Step Response Time: 300 msec typical, 400 msec max to within 99% of final
value with step input.
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Analog Output: Upscale drive when assigned to retransmitted input.
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: >120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: 120 VAC @ 15 sec max
2. RTD INPUTS: (T16 only)
Type: 2 or 3 wire
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max per input lead
Resolution: 1° or 0.1° for all types
542
TYPE
INPUT TYPE
RANGE
STANDARD
385
100 Ω platinum,
Alpha = .00385
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1112°F
IEC 751
392
100 Ω platinum,
Alpha = .003919
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1112°F
No official
standard
672
120 Ω nickel,
Alpha = .00672
-80 to +215°C
-112 to +419°F
No official
standard
Ohms
Linear Resistance
0.0 to 320.0 Ω
N/A
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part I
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 kV contact
Level 3; 8 kV air
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 kV I/O
Level 3; 2 kV power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install one ferrite core one turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to I/O
cables at unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Process and analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install one ferrite core one turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to I/O
cables and power cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g’s (10 g relay), 11 msec
in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTION: Wire-clamping screw terminals
10. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
Black plastic textured bezel with transparent display window. Controller
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when properly installed.
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
11. WEIGHT: 6.3 oz (179 g)
3. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS: (T16 only)
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, and Linear mV
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ for all types
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C typical (1.5°C max) error
over ambient temperature range.
Resolution: 1° for types R, S, B and 1° or 0.1° for all other types
TYPE
DISPLAY RANGE
-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to +750°C
E
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
J
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
K
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
R
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
S
+32 to +3214°F
+149 to +1820°C
B
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
N
-328 to +2372°F
C
0 to +2315°C
W5/W6 +32 to +4199°F
-5.00 mV to
mV
56.00 mV
T
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
(+) Blue
(-) Red
(+) Violet
(-) Red
(+) White
(-) Red
(+) Yellow
(-) Red
No
standard
No
standard
No
standard
(+) Orange
(-) Red
No
standard
N/A
BS 1843
STANDARD
(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Brown
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Yellow
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Brown
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
No
ITS-90
standard
(+) Orange
ITS-90
(-) Blue
No
ASTM
standard E988-96
N/A
N/A
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
5. TEMPERATURE INDICATION ACCURACY: (T16 only)
± (0.3% of span, +1°C) at 23 °C ambient after 20 minute warm up. Includes
NIST conformity, cold junction effect, A/D conversion errors and
linearization conformity.
Span Drift (maximum): 130 PPM/°C
6. USER INPUT: (Only controllers with alarms have a user input terminal.)
Internally pulled up to +7 VDC (100 KΩ), VIN MAX = 35 V, VIL = 0.6 V max,
VIH = 1.5 V min, IOFF = 40 μA max
Response Time: 120 msec max
Functions: Programmable
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (P16 only)
MAX
INPUT RANGE ACCURACY * IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD
10 VDC
(-1 to 11)
0.30 % of
reading
+0.03V
1 MΩ
50 V
10 mV
20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)
0.30 % of
reading
+0.04mA
10 Ω
100 mA
10 µA
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.
OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Sensor Fail Response: Upscale
Annunciator: “A1” and “A2” programmable for normal or reverse acting
4. COOLING: Software selectable (overrides Alarm 2).
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning
Cycle Time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
5. ANALOG DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Action: Control or retransmission
Update Rate: 0.1 to 250 sec
1. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS:
Relay Output:
Type: Form A
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC; 1/10 HP @ 120 VAC
(inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy)
Logic/SSR Output (main control output only):
Rating: 45 mA max @ 4 V min., 7 V nominal
2. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning or DC Analog
Cycle Time: Programmable
Auto-Tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, derivative
time, and output dampening time. Also sets input filter and (if applicable)
cooling gain.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
3. ALARMS: (optional) 2 relay alarm outputs.
Modes:
None
Absolute High Acting (Balanced or Unbalanced Hysteresis)
Absolute Low Acting (Balanced or Unbalanced Hysteresis)
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Heat (Alarm 1 on Analog Output models only)
Cool (Alarm 2)
OUTPUT
RANGE **
ACCURACY *
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
0 to 10 V
0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD
10 kΩ min
1/8000
500 Ω max
1/8000
500 Ω max
1/6400
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD
0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 5% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
T16
P16
MAIN CONTROL
2 ALARMS & USER INPUT
Relay
PART NUMBERS
18-36 VDC/24 VAC
85 to 250 VAC
—
T1610010
T1610000
Relay
Yes
T1611110
T1611100
Logic/SSR
—
T1620010
T1620000
T1621100
Logic/SSR
Yes
T1621110
Analog Out *
Yes
T1641110
T1641100
Relay
—
P1610010
P1610000
Relay
Yes
P1611110
P1611100
Logic/SSR
—
P1620010
P1620000
Logic/SSR
Yes
P1621110
P1621100
Analog Out *
Yes
P1641110
P1641100
F
* Analog out may be used for retransmitted signals. When using analog output for retransmitted signals,
AL1 becomes main control O1, if selected for heating in the analog out models.
ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.
TP16
RLY
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Programming Kit 1 : Includes Software, Comms Module w/
9-pin connector and cable, and 115 VAC Power Adapter
TP16KIT1
Programming Kit 2 : Includes Software, Comms Module w/
9-pin connector and cable
TP16KIT2
External SSR Power Unit (for Logic/SSR models)
RLY50000
25 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY60000
40 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY6A000
Three Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY70000
1-717-767-6511
543
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
BLOCK DIAGRAM
*A1 becomes main control O1, if selected for heating in the
analog out models.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
F
Although this controller is designed with a high degree of immunity to
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in each
application. The type of the electrical noise, source or coupling method into the
controller may be different for various installations. The controller becomes
more immune to EMI with fewer I/O connections. Cable length, routing, and
shield termination are very important and can mean the difference between a
successful or troublesome installation. Listed are some EMC guidelines for
successful installation in an industrial environment.
1. The controller should be mounted in a metal enclosure that is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the controller is mounted to
earth ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is more than 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the controller and leave the other end of
the shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run through metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
544
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the controller as possible. Loop the cable
through the core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for
additional protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the
controller to suppress power line interference. Install them near the power
entry point of the enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or
equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for Signal and Control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (Red Lion Controls # FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (Red Lion Controls # LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: Red Lion Controls # SNUB0000.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.0 SETTING
THE
JUMPERS
(ANALOG OUTPUT MODELS ONLY)
To insure proper operation, the Analog Output jumpers must be set to the
same range selected in programming Module 2-OP. The default jumper
setting is for 20 mA. The default setting in Module 2-OP is 4-20
mA. To access the jumpers, insert a flat-blade screwdriver
between the front panel and the side case slot. This
should disengage the top and bottom front panel
latches from the case grooves. Pull the
front panel assembly with the controller
boards out of the case. The jumpers
are located inside the controller
on the left board along the
back top section.
VIEW FROM TOP OF UNIT
2.0 INSTALLING
THE
CONTROLLER
The T16 and P16 controllers meet NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor
use to provide a watertight seal in steel panels with a minimum thickness of
0.09", or aluminum panels with a
minimum thickness of 0.12". The
controllers are designed to be
mounted into an enclosed panel.
The bezel assembly must be in
place during installation of
the controller.
Instructions:
1. Prepare the panel cutout to the proper dimensions.
2. Remove the panel latch from the controller. Discard the cardboard sleeve.
3. Carefully remove the center section of the panel gasket and discard. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the controller, seating it against the lip at the
front of the case.
4. Insert the controller into the panel cutout. While holding the controller in
place, push the panel latch over the rear of the controller, engaging the tabs
of the panel latch in the farthest forward slot possible.
5. To achieve a proper seal, tighten the panel latch
screws evenly until the controller is snug in the
panel, torquing the screws to approximately 7 inlb (79 N-cm). Overtightening can result in
distortion of the controller, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seal.
Note: The installation location of the controller is
important. Be sure to keep it away from heat
sources (ovens, furnaces, etc.) and away from
direct contact with caustic vapors, oils, steam, or
any other process by-products in which exposure
may affect proper operation.
F
Multiple Controller Stacking
The controller is designed to allow for close spacing of multiple controllers
in applications that do not require protection to NEMA 4X. Controllers can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the controller. For horizontal stacking, the
panel latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the controller. The
minimum spacing from centerline to centerline of controllers is 1.96" (49.8
mm). This spacing is the same for vertical or
horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking
controllers, provide
adequate panel
ventilation to ensure
that the maximum
operating temperature
range is not exceeded.
1-717-767-6511
545
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 WIRING
THE
CONTROLLER
WIRING CONNECTIONS
All wiring connections are made to the rear screw terminals. When wiring the
controller, use the numbers on the label and those embossed on the back of the
case, to identify the position number with the proper function.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local
codes and regulations. It is recommended that power (AC or DC) supplied to the
controller be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned
with solder). Insert the wire under the clamping washer and tighten the screw
until the wire is clamped tightly.
VDC
CONTROLLER POWER CONNECTIONS
VAC
For best results, the power should be relatively “clean” and within
the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or
from circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off should be
avoided. It is recommended that power supplied to the controller be
protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
INPUT CONNECTIONS
For two wire RTDs, install a copper sense lead of the same gauge and length
as the RTD leads. Attach one end of the wire at the probe and the other end to
input common terminal. Complete lead wire compensation is obtained. This is
RTD and Resistance
the preferred method. If a sense wire is not used, then use a jumper. A
temperature offset error will exist. The error may be compensated by
programming a temperature offset.
Thermocouple and Millivolt
Voltage and Current
CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Alarm Models
Main Control Relay Models
F
Main Control Logic/SSR Models
*A1 becomes main control O1, if selected for
heating in the analog out models.
ANALOG DC OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
546
USER INPUT CONNECTIONS
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT KEYS
FRONT PANEL KEYS
AND
DISPLAY
The Arrow keys are used to scroll through parameter
selections/values and in the Configuration Loop they are used to
scroll to the appropriate Parameter Module.
The F1 key is pressed to exit (or escape) directly to the start of the
Display Loop. While in the Display Loop, the F1 key can be pressed to
activate its programmed function.
The Loop key is pressed to advance to the next parameter, to activate
a changed selection/value, and when held for three seconds, enter the
Hidden Loop.
5.0 PROGRAMMING: DISPLAY LOOP
DISPLAY LOOP
Note: Setpoint and Output Power are the only parameters visible in the Display Loop with Factory Settings. The remaining parameters can
be selected for the Display Loop within Module 3.
Parameter availability is model and programming dependent.
F
DISPLAY LOOP
At power up, all display segments light, and then the programmed input type
and the controller’s software version will flash. Then the Temperature/Process
Value is shown in the top display, and the Setpoint Value is shown in the bottom
display. This is the Display Loop. If the Setpoint is hidden or locked, the Display
Loop will default to Output Power. If Output Power is also hidden or locked out,
the bottom display is blank. During programming, the F1 key can be pressed to
return the controller to this point. (Only in the Display Loop will the F1 key
perform the user
function programmed in Input Module
.)
When the
is pressed the controller advances to the next parameter in the
Display Loop. Except for Setpoint and % Output Power, the bottom display
alternates between the parameter name and its selection/value. The arrow keys
are pressed to change the selection/value for the shown parameter. The new
selection/value is activated when the
is pressed. Display Loop parameters
may be locked out or hidden in Lockout Module
. Some parameters are
model and programming dependent.
1-717-767-6511
547
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
The values shown for the displays are the factory settings.
INTEGRAL TIME
SETPOINT VALUE (SP1) *
SP
0
0.0
Intt «
ª 120
-999 to 9999
T16
Integral action shifts the center point position of the proportional band to
eliminate error in the steady state. The higher the integral time, the slower the
response. The optimal integral time is best determined during PID Tuning. If
time is set to zero, the previous Integral output power value is maintained.
Offset Power can be used to provide Manual Reset.
P16
SETPOINT VALUE (SP2) *
SP
0 to 9999 seconds
-999 to 9999
DERIVATIVE TIME
T16
2.0
P16
Typically, the controller is operating with the Setpoint value in the bottom
display. There is no annunciator nor parameter indication for Setpoint in the
Display Loop. The parameter name alternates with the setpoint value in the
Hidden Loop. The Setpoint value can be changed, activated and stored by
pressing the arrow keys. This is the only parameter that can be configured as
read only in the Display Loop, but read/write in the Hidden Loop. It is possible
to store a second Setpoint value that can be selected in the Hidden Loop, by the
F1 key or the user input. Both Setpoint values are limited by the Setpoint Low
and High Limits in Input Module
.
% OUTPUT POWER *
OP
0.0
-100 to 100.0
The % Output Power is shown with the %PW annunciator. The parameter
name alternates with the % Output Power value in the Hidden Loop. While the
controller is in Automatic Mode, this value is read only. When the controller is
placed in Manual Mode, the value can be changed, activated and stored by
pressing the arrow keys. For more details on % Output Power, see Control
Mode Explanations.
OUTPUT POWER OFFSET
OPOF «
ª
0.0
-100 to 100.0
When the Integral Time is set to zero and the controller is in the Automatic
Mode, this parameter will appear after % Output Power. It is also shown with
the %PW annunciator illuminated. The power offset is used to shift the
proportional band to compensate for errors in the steady state. If Integral Action
is later invoked, the controller will re-calculate the internal integral value to
provide “bumpless” transfer and Output Power Offset will not be necessary.
F
PROPORTIONAL BAND
ProP «
ª
4.0
dErt «
ª
30
0 to 9999 seconds per repeat
Derivative time helps to stabilize the response, but too high of a derivative
time, coupled with noisy signal processes, may cause the output to fluctuate too
greatly, yielding poor control. Setting the time to zero disables derivative action.
ALARM 1 VALUE
AL-1 «
ª
0
0.0
T16
-999 to 9999
P16
On models with alarms, the value for Alarm 1 can be entered here. The value
is either absolute (absolute alarm types) or relative to the Setpoint value
(deviation and band alarm types.) When Alarm 1 is programmed for HEAt or
NonE, this parameter is not available. For more details on alarms, see Alarm
Module
.
ALARM 2 VALUE
AL-2 «
ª
0
0.0
T16
-999 to 9999
P16
On models with alarms, the value for Alarm 2 can be entered here. The value
is either absolute (absolute alarm types) or relative to the Setpoint value
(deviation and band alarm types.) When Alarm 2 is programmed for CooL or
NonE, this parameter is not available. For more details on alarms, see the Alarm
Module 4-AL.
* Alternating indication only used in the Hidden Loop.
0.0 to 999.9
(% of full input range)
The proportional band should be set to obtain the best response to a process
disturbance while minimizing overshoot. A proportional band of 0.0% forces
the controller into On/Off Control with its characteristic cycling at Setpoint. For
more information, see Control Mode and PID Tuning Explanations.
548
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.0 PROGRAMMING: HIDDEN LOOP
To enter Hidden Loop, press
for 3 seconds.
HIDDEN LOOP
Note: Parameters shown bold are the only parameters visible in the Hidden Loop with Factory Settings. Setpoint and Output Power are
factory set for the Display Loop. The remaining parameters can be selected for the Hidden Loop within Module 3.
Parameter availability is model and programming dependent.
HIDDEN LOOP
When
is pressed and held for three seconds, the controller advances to the
Hidden Loop. The Temperature/Process Value is shown in the top display. The
bottom display alternates between the parameter and its selection/value.
or
is pressed to change the selection/value for the shown parameter. The new
selection/value is activated after
is pressed. When
is pressed, the
controller returns to the Display Loop and stores changed selection/values to
permanent memory. Hidden Loop parameters may be locked out in Lockout
Module 3-LC. Some parameters are model and programming dependent.
ACCESS CODE
CodE «
ª
0
1 to 125
If the Access Code is set from 1 to 125, in Lockout Module
, Access
Code will appear here. By entering the proper Code, access to the Hidden Loop
is permitted. With the factory setting of 0, Access Code will not appear in the
Hidden Loop. A universal code of 111 can be entered to gain access,
independent of the programmed code number.
SPrP «
ª
0.0
SP1 or SP2
The SPSL function allows the operator to switch from or to, setpoint 1 and
setpoint 2. In the Display Loop, there is no annunciator indicating the selected
Setpoint, however, the selected Setpoint value is displayed and activated.
0.0 to 999.9
The setpoint ramp rate can reduce sudden shock to the process and reduce
overshoot on startup or after setpoint changes, by ramping the setpoint at a
controlled rate. R annunciator flashes while ramping. With the T16, the ramp rate
is always in tenths of degrees per minute, regardless of the resolution chosen for
the process display. With the P16, the ramp rate is in least-significant (display
units) digits per minute. A value of 0.0 or 0 disables setpoint ramping. Once the
ramping setpoint reaches the target setpoint, the setpoint ramp rate disengages
until the setpoint is changed again. If the ramp value is changed during ramping,
the new ramp rate takes effect. If the setpoint is ramping prior to starting AutoTune, the ramping is suspended during Auto-Tune and then resumed afterward.
Deviation and band alarms are relative to the target setpoint, not the ramping
setpoint. A slow process may not track the programmed setpoint rate. At power
up, the ramping setpoint is initialized at the ambient temperature/process value.
F
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
trnF «
ª Auto
SETPOINT SELECT
SPSL «
ª SP1
SETPOINT RAMP RATE
Auto USEr
In Automatic Mode, the percentage of Output Power is automatically
determined by the controller. In Manual/User USEr Mode, the percentage of
Output Power is adjusted manually while in the Display Loop. The Control
Mode can also be transferred through the F1 Key or User Input. For more
information, see Control Mode Explanations.
1-717-767-6511
549
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
AUTO-TUNE START
tUNE «
ª
NO
ACCESS CODE
CodE «
ª
0
NO YES
The Auto-Tune procedure of the controller sets the Proportional Band,
Integral Time, Derivative Time, Digital Filter, Control Output Dampening
Time, and Relative Gain (Heat/Cool) values appropriate to the characteristics of
the process. This parameter allows front panel starting YES or stopping NO of
Auto-Tune. For more information, see PID Tuning Explanations.
-1 to -125
If the Access Code is set from -1 to -125, in Lockout Module 3-LC, Access
Code will appear here. By entering the proper Code, access to the Configuration
Loop is permitted (with a negative Code value, the Hidden Loop can be
accessed without the use of a code). With the factory setting of 0 or with an
active User Input configured for Program Lock (PLOC), Access Code will not
appear here. An active user input configured for Program Lock (PLOC) always
locks out the Configuration Loop, regardless of Access Code.
ALARMS RESET
ALrS «
ª 1-2
1-2
With alarm models, the alarms can be manually reset. The up key resets
Alarm 1 and the down key resets Alarm 2.
7.0 PROGRAMMING: CONFIGURATION LOOP
CONFIGURATION LOOP
F
To access the Configuration Loop, press the up key when CNFP/NO is displayed
in the Hidden Loop. The arrow keys are used to select the parameter module (19). To enter a specific module press
while the module number is displayed.
In the Configuration Loop, CNFP will alternate with the parameter number in the
bottom display. The Temperature/Process Value is shown in the top display.
After entering a parameter module, press
to advance through the
parameter names in the module. To change a parameter’s selection/value, press
the arrow keys while the parameter is displayed. In the modules, the top display
shows the parameter name, and the bottom display shows the selection/value.
Use
to enter any selection/values that have been changed. The change is not
committed to permanent memory until the controller is returned to the Display
Loop. If a power loss occurs before returning to the Display Loop, the new
values must be entered again.
At the end of each module, the controller returns to CNFP/NO. At this location,
pressing
again returns the display to the the Display Loop. Pressing the Up
key allows re-entrance to the Configuration Loop. Whenever
is pressed, End
momentarily appears as the parameters are stored to permanent memory and the
controller returns to the Display Loop.
550
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (
) T16 ONLY
PARAMETER MENU
INPUT TYPE
tYPE
tc-j
SELECTION TYPE
tc-t
tc-E
tctc-K
tc-r
tc-S
tc-b
T TC
E TC
J TC
K TC
R TC
S TC
B TC
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SELECTION
tc-N
tc-C
LIN
r385
r392
r672
rLIN
SPLO
0
TYPE
N TC
C TC
The controller has a programmable low setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set below the safe operating area of the process.
Linear mV
RTD 385
RTD 392
RTD 672
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
Linear Ohms
SPHI
9999
Select the input type that corresponds to the input sensor.
TEMPERATURE SCALE
SCAL
°F
°F Fahrenheit
°C Celsius
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
DIGITAL FILTERING
0 = least to 4 = most
The filter is an adaptive digital filter that discriminates between measurement
noise and actual process changes. If the signal is varying too greatly due to
measurement noise, increase the filter value. If the fastest controller response is
needed, decrease the filter value.
SHIFT/OFFSET
SHft
0
USER INPUT FUNCTION (OPTIONAL)
InPt
PLOC
SELECTION
0 to 0.0 for temperature and resistance inputs
0.00 for mV inputs
Select whole degrees, or tenths of degrees for Temperature display, Setpoint
values, and related parameters. For Linear Resistance inputs rLIN, the same
parameter selections apply in ohms or tenths of an ohm. For mV inputs LIN,
only hundredths of a mV resolution is available.
FLtr
1
-999 to 9999
The controller has a programmable high setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set above the safe operating area of the process.
Select either degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. For linear mV and ohms input
types, this has no effect. If changed, adjust related parameter values, as the
controller does not automatically convert them.
dCPt
0
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999 degrees
This value offsets the controller’s temperature display value by the entered
amount. This is useful in applications in which the sensor cannot provide the
actual temperature signal due to mounting constraints, inaccuracy, etc.
NONE
PLOC
ILOC
trnF
FUNCTION
No Function
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
SELECTION
SPt
SPrP
ALrS
FUNCTION
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
Setpoint Ramp Disable
Reset Both Alarms
Auto/Manual Select
The controller performs the selected User Input function (User Input
available only on models with alarms), when the User terminal 1 is connected
(pulled low) to Common terminal 8.
No Function: No function is performed.
Program Lock: The Configuration Loop is locked, as long as activated
(maintained action).
Integral Action Lock: The integral action of the PID computation is disabled
(frozen), as long as activated (maintained action).
Auto/Manual Select: This function selects (maintained action) Automatic
(open) or Manual Control (activated).
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select: This function selects (maintained action) Setpoint
1(open) or Setpoint 2 (activated) as the active setpoint.
Setpoint Ramp Disable: The setpoint ramping feature is disabled, as long as
activated (maintained action). Any time the user input is activated with a
ramp in process, ramping is aborted.
Reset Alarms: Active alarms are reset, as long as activated (maintained action).
Active alarms are reset until the alarm condition is cleared and triggered
again (momentary action).
1-717-767-6511
F
551
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
F1 KEY FUNCTION
The controller performs the selected F1 Key Function, when
is pressed
while in the Display Loop. In any other loop or module location, pressing
will perform an escape to the Display Loop.
No Function: No function is performed.
Auto/Manual Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Automatic and Manual Control.
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2.
Reset Alarms: This function can be used to reset one or both of the alarms
when activated (momentary action) The alarm will remain reset until the
alarm condition is cleared and triggered again.
F1In
NONE
SELECTION
NONE
trnF
SPt
FUNCTION
SELECTION
No Function
A1rS
A2rS
ALrS
Auto/Manual Select
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
FUNCTION
Reset Alarm 1
Reset Alarm 2
Reset Both Alarms
7.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (
) P16 ONLY
PARAMETER MENU
INPUT TYPE
tYPE
Curr
SELECTION
TYPE
Curr
VOLt
Current
Voltage
SCALING
To scale the controller, two scaling points are necessary. Each scaling point has
a coordinate pair of Display Values and Input Values. It is recommended that the
two scaling points be at the low and high ends of the input signal being measured.
Process value scaling will be linear between and continue past the entered points
to the limits of the input range. (Factory settings example will display 0.0 at 4.00
mA input and display 100.0 at 20.00 mA input.) Reverse acting indication can be
accomplished by reversing the two signal points or the Display value points, but
not both. If both are reversed, forward (normal) acting indication will occur. In
either case, do not reverse the input wires to change the action.
Select the input type that corresponds to the input signal.
PERCENT ANNUNCIATOR
PCt
NO
YES On
NO Off
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING POINT 1
This only illuminates the % annunciator. It does not perform any type of
percent function, but is useful in applications that have been scaled in percent.
INPUT VALUE SCALING POINT 1
0 0.0 0.00 0.000
This selection affects the decimal point placement for the Process value, and
related parameters.
F
ROUNDING INCREMENT
rnd
0.1
1 to 100
In steps of 1 least significant digit,
regardless of decimal point.
Rounding selections other than 1 cause the process value display to round to
the nearest rounding increment selected. (For example, rounding of 5 causes 122
to round to 120 and 123 to round to 125.) Rounding starts at the least significant
digit of the process value. Setpoint values, Setpoint limits, Alarm values, Input
Scaling values, and Analog Scaling values are not affected by rounding.
DIGITAL FILTERING
FLtr
1
-999 to 9999
Enter the first coordinate Display Value by using the arrow keys.
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
dCPt
0.0
dSP1
0.0
INP1
4.00
0.00 to 20.00 mA
0.00 to 10.00 V
For Key-in Method, enter the first coordinate Input Value by using the arrow
keys. To allow the P16 to “learn” the signal, use the Applied Method. For Applied
Method, press . The ° annunciator is turned on to indicate the applied method.
Adjust the applied signal level externally until the appropriate value appears
under INP1. Using either method, press
to store the value for INP1. (The
controller can be toggled back to the Key-in Method by pressing
before .)
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING POINT 2
dSP2
100.0
-999 to 9999
Enter the second coordinate Display Value by using the arrow keys.
0 = least to 4 = most
The filter is an adaptive digital filter that discriminates between measurement
noise and actual process changes. If the signal is varying too greatly due to
measurement noise, increase the filter value. If the fastest controller response is
needed, decrease the filter value.
552
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
INPUT VALUE SCALING POINT 2
INP2
20.00
F1 KEY FUNCTION
F1In
NONE
0.00 to 20.00 mA
0.00 to 10.00 V
For Key-in Method, enter the second coordinate Input Value by using the
arrow keys. To allow the P16 to “learn” the signal, use the Applied Method. For
Applied Method, press
. The ° annunciator is turned on to indicate the
applied method. Adjust the applied signal level externally until the appropriate
value appears under INP2. Using either method, press
to store the value for
INP2. (The controller can be toggled back to the Key-in Method by pressing
before .)
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SPLO
-999 to 9999
The controller has a programmable low setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set below the safe operating area of the process.
SELECTION
NONE
trnF
SPt
FUNCTION
No Function
Auto/Manual Select
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
SELECTION
A1rS
A2rS
ALrS
FUNCTION
Reset Alarm 1
Reset Alarm 2
Reset Both Alarms
The controller performs the selected F1 key function, when
is pressed
while in the Display Loop. In any other loop or module location, pressing
will perform an escape to the Display Loop.
No Function: No function is performed.
Auto/Manual Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Automatic and Manual Control.
Setpoint 1 or 2 Selection: This function toggles (momentary action) the
controller between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2.
Reset Alarms: This function can be used to reset one or both of the alarms
when activated (momentary action). The alarm will remain reset until the
alarm condition is cleared and triggered again.
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
SPHI
999.9
-999 to 9999
The controller has a programmable high setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set above the safe operating area of the process.
USER INPUT FUNCTION (OPTIONAL)
InPt
PLOC
SELECTION
NONE
PLOC
ILOC
trnF
FUNCTION
No Function
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
SELECTION
SPt
SPrP
ALrS
FUNCTION
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
Setpoint Ramp Disable
Reset Both Alarms
Auto/Manual Select
The controller performs the selected User Input function (User Input
available only on models with alarms), when the User terminal 1 is connected
(pulled low) to Common terminal 8.
No Function: No function is performed.
Program Lock: The Configuration Loop is locked, as long as activated
(maintained action).
Integral Action Lock: The integral action of the PID computation is disabled
(frozen), as long as activated (maintained action).
Auto/Manual Select: This function selects (maintained action) Automatic
(open) or Manual Control (activated).
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select: This function selects (maintained action) Setpoint
1(open) or Setpoint 2 (activated) as the active setpoint.
Setpoint Ramp Disable: The setpoint ramping feature is disabled, as long as
activated (maintained action). Any time the user input is activated with a
ramp in process, ramping is aborted.
Reset Alarms: Active alarms are reset, as long as activated (maintained action).
Active alarms are reset until the alarm condition is cleared and triggered
again (momentary action).
1-717-767-6511
F
553
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.2 MODULE 2 - OUTPUT PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
SENSOR FAIL POWER LEVEL
CYCLE TIME
CYCt
2.0
OPFL
0
0.0 to 250.0 seconds
The Cycle Time is entered in seconds with one tenth of a second resolution.
It is the total time for one on and one off period of the time proportioning
control output O1. With time proportional control, the percentage of power is
converted into an output on-time relative to the cycle time value set. (If the
controller calculates that 65% power is required and a cycle time of 10.0
seconds is set, the output will be on for 6.5 seconds and off for 3.5 seconds.)
For best control, a cycle time equal to one-tenth or less, of the natural period of
oscillation of the process is recommended. When using the Analog Output
signal for control, the Cycle Time setting has no effect. If the O1 output is not
being used, a cycle time of 0 can be entered to prevent the output and indicator
from cycling.
0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2
This parameter sets the power level for the control outputs in the event of a
sensor failure. If Alarm 2 is not selected for cooling, the range is from 0% (O1
output full off) to 100% (O1 output full on). If A2 is selected for cooling, the
range is from -100 to +100%. At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is
on; and at -100%, O2 is on. The alarm outputs are upscale drive with an open
sensor, and downscale drive with a shorted sensor (RTD only), independent of
this setting. Manual Control overrides the sensor fail preset.
OUTPUT POWER DAMPENING
OPdP
3
1
CONTROL ACTION
OPAC
rEv
drct Direct (cooling)
rEv Reverse (heating)
This determines the control action for the PID loop. Programmed for direct
action (cooling), the output power will increase if the Process value is above the
Setpoint value. Programmed for reverse action (heating), the output power
decreases when the Process Value is above the Setpoint Value. For heat and cool
applications, this is typically set to reverse. This allows O1 or A1 (models with
Analog Output) to be used for heating, and A2/O2 to be used for cooling.
F
ON/OFF CONTROL HYSTERESIS
2
0.2
0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2
This parameter may be used to limit controller power at the lower end due to
process disturbances or setpoint changes. Enter the safe output power limits for
the process. If Alarm 2 is selected for cooling, the range is from -100 to +100%.
At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is on; and at -100%, O2 is on.
When the controller is in Manual Control Mode, this limit does not apply.
P16
AUTO-TUNE CODE
0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2
This parameter may be used to limit controller power at the upper end due to
process disturbances or setpoint changes. Enter the safe output power limits for
the process. If Alarm 2 is selected for cooling, the range is from -100 to +100%.
At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is on; and at -100%, O2 is on.
When the controller is in Manual Control Mode, this limit does not apply.
554
1 to 250
T16
The controller can be placed in the On/Off Control Mode by setting the
Proportional Band to 0.0%. The On/Off Control Hysteresis (balanced around
the setpoint) eliminates output chatter. In heat/cool applications, the control
hysteresis value affects both Output O1 and Output O2 control. It is suggested
to set the hysteresis band to Factory Setting prior to starting Auto-Tune. After
Auto-Tune, the hysteresis band has no effect on PID Control. On/Off Control
Hysteresis is illustrated in the On/Off Control Mode section.
OUTPUT POWER UPPER LIMIT
OPHI
100
P16
The Dampening Time, entered as a time constant in seconds, dampens
(filters) the calculated output power. Increasing the value increases the
dampening effect. Generally, dampening times in the range of one-twentieth to
one-fiftieth of the controller’s integral time (or process time constant) are
effective. Dampening times longer than these may cause controller instability
due to the added lag effect.
CHYS
OUTPUT POWER LOWER LIMIT
OPLO
0
0 to 250 seconds
T16
tcod
0
0 fastest to 2 slowest
Prior to starting Auto-Tune, this code should be set to achieve the necessary
dampening level under PID Control. This value allows customization of the PID
values that Auto-Tune will calculate. For the process to be controlled
aggressively (fastest process response with possible overshoot), set the AutoTune Code to 0. For the process to be controlled conservatively (slowest
response with the least amount of overshoot), set this value to 2. If the Auto-Tune
Code is changed, Auto-Tune needs to be reinitiated for the changes to affect the
PID settings. For more information, see PID Tuning Explanations Section.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ANALOG LOW SCALING (OPTIONAL)
ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE (OPTIONAL)
ANtP
4-20
0-10 V 0-20 mA
4-20 mA
to
0.0
Select the type of output and range. The Analog output jumpers are factory
set to current. They must be changed if voltage output is desired. The Analog
output can be calibrated to provide up to approximately 5% over range
operation (0 mA current can only go slightly negative).
The Analog Output assignment value that corresponds to 0 V, 0 mA or 4 mA
output as selected.
ANALOG HIGH SCALING (OPTIONAL)
ANHI
100.0
ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT (OPTIONAL)
ANAS
OP
OP Main Control % Output Power
InP Input Signal Retransmission
SP Active Setpoint
This setting selects the parameter that the Analog Output will retransmit or
track.
-999 to 9999
The Analog Output assignment value that corresponds to 10 V or 20 mA
output as selected. An inverse acting output can be achieved by reversing the
low and high scaling points.
ANALOG UPDATE TIME (OPTIONAL)
ANUt
0
0 to 250 seconds
0 = update rate of 0.1 second
The update time of the Analog Output can be used to reduce excess valve
actuator or pen recorder activity.
7.3 MODULE 3 - LOCKOUT PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
SELECTION
dISP
HIdE
LOC
dSPr
ACCESS CODE
DESCRIPTION
CodE
0
Display: accessible in Display Loop.
Hide: accessible in Hidden Loop.
-125 to
Locked: not accessible in either loop.
(SP only)
Display/read: read only in Display Loop,
but read/write in Hidden Loop.
0
-1 to -125
1 to 125
The following parameters can be configured for LOC, HIdE, and dISP.
Full access to Display, Hidden,
and Configuration Loops
Code necessary to access
Configuration Loop only.
Code necessary to access
Hidden and Configuration Loops.
F
The following parameters can be configured for LOC or HIdE only.
SETPOINT
ACCESS
SP
dISP
OUTPUT
POWER
ACCESS
OP
dISP
PID VALUES
ACCESS
PId
HIdE
ALARM
VALUES
ACCESS
AL
HIdE
SETPOINT
SELECT
ACCESS
SETPOINT
RAMP
ACCESS
CONTROL
TRANSFER
ACCESS
SPrP
HIdE
trnF
LOC
SPSL
LOC
AUTO-TUNE
START
ACCESS
tUNE
HIdE
1-717-767-6511
RESET
ALARMS
ACCESS
ALrS
LOC
555
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.4 MODULE 4 - ALARM PARAMETERS (
) (OPTIONAL)
PARAMETER MENU
AVAILABLE ALARM ACTIONS
NONE
None
No action, the remaining Alarm
parameters are not available.
AbHI
Absolute High
(balanced hysteresis)
The alarm energizes when the Process
Value exceeds the alarm value + 1/2
the hysteresis value.
AbLO
Absolute Low
(balanced hysteresis)
The alarm energizes when the Process
Value falls below the alarm value -1/2
the hysteresis value.
AuHI
Absolute High
(unbalanced hysteresis)
AuLO
Absolute Low
(unbalanced hysteresis)
d-HI
Deviation High
Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value
d-LO
Deviation Low
Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value
b-IN
Band Acting
(inside)
Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value
b-ot
Band Acting
(outside)
Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value
The alarm energizes when the Process
Value exceeds the alarm value.
HEAt
Heat (A1 Analog
models only)
If heating is selected, the remaining
Alarm 1 parameters are not available.
The alarm energizes when the Process
Value falls below the alarm value.
CooL
Cool
(A2 only)
If cooling is selected, the remaining
Alarm 2 parameters are not available.
ALARM ACTION FIGURES
F
Note: Hys in the above figures refers to the Alarm Hysteresis.
556
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ALARM ACTION ALARM 1
ACt1
AuHI
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR ALARM 2
Lit2
nor
NONE AbHI AbLO AuHI AuLO
d-HI d-LO b-IN b-ot HEAt
nor Normal
rEv Reverse
Select the action for the alarms. See Alarm Action Figures for a visual
explanation.
With normal selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “on” alarm output 2.
With reverse selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “off” alarm output.
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR ALARM 1
ALARM RESET MODE ALARM 2
nor
rSt2
Auto
nor Normal
rEv Reverse
With normal selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “on” alarm output 1.
With reverse selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “off” alarm output.
ALARM RESET MODE ALARM 1
rSt1
Auto
Auto Automatic
LAtc Latched
ALARM STANDBY ALARM 1
YES Standby on
NO Standby off
Standby prevents nuisance (typically low level) alarms after a power up or
setpoint change. After powering up the controller or changing the setpoint, the
process must leave the alarm region (enter normal non-alarm area of operation).
After this has occurred, the standby is disabled and the alarm responds normally
until the next controller power up or setpoint change.
ALARM VALUE ALARM 2
ALARM VALUE ALARM 1
AL-1
AL-2
20
2.0
-999 to 9999
T16
P16
The alarm values are entered as process units or degrees. They can also be
entered in the Display or Hidden Loops. When the alarm is configured as
deviation or band acting, the associated output tracks the Setpoint as it is
changed. The value entered is the offset or difference from the Setpoint.
-999 to 9999
ALARM HYSTERESIS
T16
AHYS
P16
The alarm values are entered as process units or degrees. They can also be
entered in the Display or Hidden Loops. When the alarm is configured as
deviation or band acting, the associated output tracks the Setpoint as it is
changed. The value entered is the offset or difference from the Setpoint.
ALARM ACTION ALARM 2
ACt2
AuHI
Stb2
NO
YES Standby on
NO Standby off
Standby prevents nuisance (typically low level) alarms after a power up or
setpoint change. After powering up the controller or changing the setpoint, the
process must leave the alarm region (enter normal non-alarm area of operation).
After this has occurred, the standby is disabled and the alarm responds normally
until the next controller power up or setpoint change.
0
0.0
In Automatic mode, an energized alarm turns off automatically after the
Temperature/Process value leaves the alarm region. In Latched mode, an
energized alarm requires an F1 key or user input alarm reset to turn off. After an
alarm reset, the alarm remains reset off until the trigger point is crossed again.
ALARM STANDBY ALARM 2
In Automatic mode, an energized alarm turns off automatically after the
Temperature/Process value leaves the alarm region. In Latched mode, an
energized alarm requires an F1 key or user input alarm reset to turn off. After an
alarm reset, the alarm remains reset off until the trigger point is crossed again.
Stb1
NO
Auto Automatic
LAtc Latched
NONE AbHI AbLO AuHI AuLO
d-HI d-LO b-IN b-ot CooL
1
0.1
0 to 250
T16
P16
The Hysteresis Value is either added to or subtracted from the alarm value,
depending on the alarm action selected. The same value applies to both alarms.
See the Alarm Action Figures for a visual explanation of how alarm actions are
affected by the hysteresis.
F
Select the action for the alarms. See Alarm Action Figures for a visual
explanation.
1-717-767-6511
557
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.5 MODULE 5 - COOLING (SECONDARY) PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
To enable Cooling in Heat/Cool applications, the Alarm 2 Action must first
be set for Cooling. (For P16 Controllers, the cooling output is sometimes
referred to as secondary output.) When set to cooling, the output no longer
operates as an alarm but operates as a cooling output. The O2 terminals are the
same as A2, however a separate O2 annunciator indicates Cooling Operation.
Cooling output power ranges from -100% (full cooling) to 0% (no cooling,
unless a heat/cool overlap is used). The Power Limits in Output Module
also limit the cooling power. In applications requiring only a Cooling output,
the main 01 output should be used.
CYCLE TIME
CYC2
2.0
0.0 to 250.0 seconds
DEADBAND/OVERLAP
db-2
0
-999 to 9999
This defines the overlap area in which both heating and cooling are active
(negative value) or the deadband area between the bands (positive value). If a
heat/cool overlap is specified, the percent output power is the sum of the heat
power (O1) and the cool power (O2). If Relative Gain is zero, the cooling
output operates in the On/Off Control Mode, with the On/Off Control
Hysteresis CHYS in Output Module 2-OP becoming the cooling output hysteresis.
The function of Deadband is illustrated in the Control Mode Explanations. For
most applications, set this parameter to 0.0 prior to starting Auto-Tune. After
the completion of Auto-Tune, this parameter may be changed.
This cycle time functions like the O1 Output Cycle Time but allows
independent cycle time for cooling. A setting of zero will keep output O2 off.
RELATIVE GAIN
GAN2
1.0
0.0 to 10.0
This defines the gain of the cooling relative to the heating. It is generally set
to balance the effects of cooling to that of heating. This is illustrated in the
Heat/Cool Relative Gain Figures. A value of 0.0 places the cooling output into
On/Off Control.
HEAT/COOL RELATIVE GAIN FIGURES
F
Heat/Cool Deadband = 0
Heat/Cool Deadband < 0
Heat/Cool Deadband > 0
558
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.5 MODULE 9 FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
RTD Resistance (T16)
CALIBRATION
RTD calibration requires a precision 277.0 ohm resistor with an accuracy of
0.1 Ω (or better). Connect a jumper between terminals 9 and 10 with a 0 ohm
jumper between 9 and 8 at StP1 and the 277.0 ohm resistor between 9 and 8 at
StP2. If using thermocouple only, the RTD calibration need not be performed.
CodE
48
The controller is fully calibrated from the factory. Recalibration is
recommended every two years by qualified technicians using appropriate
equipment. Calibration may be performed by using the front panel or with the
TP16KIT. The front panel method is explained below. (Refer to the TP16KIT
bulletin for calibration instructions using TP16KIT cable and software.)
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the controller before
exiting Factory Service Module 9-FS. In this case, the existing calibration
settings remain in effect.
Note: Allow the controller to warm up for 30 minutes minimum and follow
the manufacturer’s warm-up recommendations for the calibration source or
measuring device.
PROMPT
[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]
[rtd]
[StP1]
[StP2]
APPLY
FRONT PANEL ACTION
Press
.
Press
.
Press
0.0 ohm
until
Press
for
48, press
.
YES, press
.
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
277.0 ohm After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
Input Calibration (P16)
Millivolt Calibration (T16)
Millivolt calibration requires a precision voltage source with an accuracy of
0.03% (or better) connected to terminals 8 (comm.) and 9 (+). When calibrating
the input, the millivolt calibration must be performed first, then the Cold Junction
or RTD Resistance.
PROMPT
APPLY
[CodE]
[CAL]
[StP1]
[StP2]
[StP3]
[StP4]
[StP5]
FRONT PANEL ACTION
Press
until
48, press
.
Press
for
YES, press
.
0.0 mV
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
14.0 mV
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
28.0 mV
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
42.0 mV
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
56.0 mV
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
Process calibration requires a precision signal source with an accuracy of
0.03% (or better) that is capable of generating 10.0 V connected to terminals 8
(COMM) and 9 (+10V) and 20.00 mA connected to terminals 8 (COMM) and
10 (20mA). The current calibration can be skipped by pressing
at the not
applicable prompts if using the controller for process voltage only.
PROMPT
[CodE]
[CAL]
[StP1]
[StP2]
[StP3]
[StP4]
[StP5]
[StPA]
[StPb]
Cold Junction (T16)
APPLY
FRONT PANEL ACTION
Press
until
Press
for
48, press
.
YES, press
.
0.0 V
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
2.5 V
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
5.0 V
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
7.5 V
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
10.0 V
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
0.0 mA
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
20.0 mA
After 5 seconds (minimum), press
.
F
Cold Junction calibration requires a thermocouple of known accuracy of
types T, E, J, K, C or N (connected to terminals 8 and 9) and a calibrated
external reference thermocouple probe measuring in °C with resolution to
tenths. The two probes should be brought in contact with each other or in some
way held at the same temperature. They should be shielded from air movement
and allowed sufficient time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the
T16 thermocouple may be placed in a calibration bath of known temperature.)
If performing the millivolt calibration prior, verify that the correct input type is
configured in Input Module 1-IN before performing the following procedure.
(After the millivolt calibration the controller will default to type J.) If using RTD
only, the cold junction calibration need not be performed.
PROMPT
COMPARE
[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]
FRONT PANEL ACTION
Press
Press
Press
Top display to
external
reference
until
48, press
.
YES, press
.
.
for
Press
or
to adjust the
bottom display until the top
process display matches the
external reference then press
.
1-717-767-6511
559
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Analog Output Calibration (T16 and P16)
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
Set the controller Analog jumpers to the output type being calibrated.
Connect an external meter with an accuracy of 0.05% (or better) that is capable
of measuring 10.00 V or 20.00 mA to terminals 6 (+V/I) and 7 (-V/I). The
voltage or current calibration that is not being used must be skipped by pressing
until End appears.
PROMPT
[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]
[rtd]
[ANCL]
[C 0v]
EXTERNAL
METER
CodE
66
Press and hold
to display CodE 66. Press . The controller will display
rSEt and then return to CNFP. Press
to return to the Display Loop. This will
overwrite all user settings with Factory Settings.
FRONT PANEL ACTION
Press
until
, press
Press
.
Press
. (T16 only)
Press
. (T16 only)
Press
for
, press
.
NOMINAL CALIBRATION SETTINGS
CodE
77
.
0.00 V
Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .
C 10v
10.00 V
Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .
C 0c]
0.00 mA
Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .
C 20c
20.00 mA
Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .
Press and hold
to display CodE 77. Press . Press and hold
to display
CodE 77 again. Press . The controller will then return to CNFP. Press
to
return to the Display Loop. This will not overwrite any user settings but will
erase the controller calibration values. This procedure does not require any
calibration signals nor external meters. This can be used to clear calibration
error flag E-CL.
CAUTION: This procedure will result in up to ±10% reading error and the
controller will no longer be within factory specifications. For this reason, this
procedure should only be performed if meter error is outside of this range to
temporarily restore operation until the unit can be accurately calibrated.
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support.
PROBLEM
NO DISPLAY
CAUSE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power off.
Brown-out condition.
Loose connection or improperly wired.
Bezel assembly not fully seated into rear of controller.
CONTROLLER NOT WORKING 1. Incorrect setup parameters.
F
REMEDIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check power.
Verify power reading.
Check connections.
Check installation.
1. Check setup parameters.
E-E2 IN DISPLAY
1. Loss of setup parameters due to noise spike or other 1. Press F1 to escape, then check all setup parameters.
EMI event.
a. Check sensor input and AC line for excessive noise.
b. If fault persists, replace controller.
E-CL IN DISPLAY
1. Loss of calibration parameters due to noise spike or 1. Press F1 to escape, then check controller accuracy.
other EMI event.
a. Recalibrate controller. (See Factory Service Module code 77.)
b. Reset parameters to factory default settings.
dddd or -ddd IN DISPLAY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Display value exceeds 4 digit display range.
Defective or miscalibrated cold junction circuit.
Loss of setup parameters.
Internal malfunction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Change resolution to display whole number and verify reading.
Perform cold junction calibration.
Check setup parameters.
Perform Input calibration.
OPEN IN DISPLAY (T16)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Probe disconnected.
Broken or burned-out probe.
Corroded or broken terminations.
Excessive process temperature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect probe.
Replace probe.
Check connections.
Check process parameters.
SENS IN DISPLAY (P16)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Input exceeds range of controller.
Incorrect input wiring.
Defective transmitter.
Internal malfunction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check input parameters.
Check input wiring.
Replace transmitter.
Perform input calibration.
OLOL IN TOP DISPLAY
1. Input exceeds range of controller.
2. Temperature exceeds range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive high temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a higher temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Reduce temperature.
Perform input calibration.
1. Input is below range of controller.
2. Temperature below range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive low temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a lower temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Raise temperature.
Perform input calibration.
1. RTD probe shorted.
1. Check wiring and/or replace RTD probe.
ULUL
IN TOP DISPLAY
SHrt IN DISPLAY (T16)
CONTROLLER SLUGGISH OR 1. Incorrect PID values.
2. Incorrect probe location.
NOT STABLE
560
1. See PID control.
2. Evaluate probe location.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONTROL MODE EXPLANATIONS
ON/OFF CONTROL
The controller operates in On/Off Control when the Proportional Band is set
to 0.0%. In this control mode, the process will constantly oscillate around the
setpoint value. The On/Off Control Hysteresis (balanced around the setpoint)
can be used to eliminate output chatter. Output O1 Control Action can be set to
reverse for heating (output on when below the setpoint) or direct for cooling
(output on when above the setpoint) applications.
ON/OFF CONTROL - HEAT/COOL OUTPUT FIGURES
ON/OFF CONTROL REVERSE OR DIRECT ACTING FIGURES
Note: CHYS in the On/Off Control Figures refers to the On/Off Control Hysteresis
(CHYS) in parameter Module 2.
For heat and cool systems, O1 Control Action is set to reverse (heat) and the
Alarm 2 Action is set to cooling (O2). The Proportional Band is set to 0.0 and
the Relative Gain in Cooling to 0.0. The Deadband in Cooling sets the amount
of operational deadband or overlap between the outputs. The setpoint and the
On/Off Control Hysteresis applies to both O1 and O2 outputs. The hysteresis is
balanced in relationship to the setpoint and deadband value.
PID CONTROL
In PID Control, the controller processes the input and then calculates a
control output power value by use of a modified Proportional Band, Integral
Time, and Derivative Time control algorithm. The system is controlled with the
new output power value to keep the process at the setpoint. The Control Action
for PID Control can be set to reverse for heating (output on when below the
setpoint) or direct for cooling (output on when above the setpoint) applications.
For heat and cool systems, the heat (O1) and cool (O2) outputs are both used.
The PID parameters can be established by using Auto-Tune, or they can be
Manually tuned to the process.
1-717-767-6511
TYPICAL PID RESPONSE CURVE
F
561
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TIME PROPORTIONAL PID CONTROL
MANUAL CONTROL MODE
In Time Proportional applications, the output power is converted into output
On time using the Cycle Time. For example, with a four second cycle time and
75% power, the output will be on for three seconds (4 × 0.75) and off for
one second.
The cycle time should be no greater than 1/10 of the natural period of
oscillation for the process. The natural period is the time it takes for one
complete oscillation when the process is in a continuously oscillating state.
In Manual Control Mode, the controller operates as an open loop system
(does not use the setpoint and process feedback). The user adjusts the
percentage of power through the % Power display to control the power for
Output O1. When Alarm 2 is configured for Cooling (O2), Manual operation
provides 0 to 100% power to O1 (heating) and -100 to 0% power to O2
(Cooling). The Low and High Output Power limits are ignored when the
controller is in Manual.
LINEAR PID CONTROL
MODE TRANSFER
In Linear PID Control applications, the Analog Output Assignment ANAS is set
to % Output Power, OP. The Analog Low Scaling, ANLO , is set to 0.0 and the
Analog High Scaling, ANHI , is set to 100.0. The Analog Output will then be
proportional to the PID calculated % output power for Heat or Cooling per the
Control Action OPAC. For example, with 0 VDC to 10 VDC (scaled 0 to 100%)
and 75% power, the analog output will be 7.5 VDC.
When transferring the controller mode between Automatic and Manual, the
controlling outputs remain constant, exercising true “bumpless” transfer. When
transferring from Manual to Automatic, the power initially remains steady, but
Integral Action corrects (if necessary) the closed loop power demand at a rate
proportional to the Integral Time.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE
In Automatic Control Mode, the percentage of output power is automatically
determined by PID or On/Off calculations based on the setpoint and process
feedback. For this reason, PID Control and On/Off Control always imply
Automatic Control Mode.
PID TUNING EXPLANATIONS
AUTO-TUNE
Auto-Tune is a user-initiated function that allows the controller to
automatically determine the Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time,
Digital Filter, Control Output Dampening Time, and Relative Gain (Heat/Cool)
values based upon the process characteristics. The Auto-Tune operation cycles
the controlling output(s) at a control point three-quarters of the distance
between the present process value and the setpoint. The nature of these
oscillations determines the settings for the controller’s parameters.
Prior to initiating Auto-Tune, it is important that the controller and system be
first tested. (This can be accomplished in On/Off Control or Manual Control
Mode.) If there is a wiring, system or controller problem, Auto-Tune may give
incorrect tuning or may never finish. Auto-Tune may be initiated at start-up,
from setpoint or at any other process point. However, ensure normal process
conditions (example: minimize unusual external load disturbances) as they will
have an effect on the PID calculations.
Start Auto-Tune
Below are the parameters and factory settings that affect Auto-Tune. If these
setting are acceptable then Auto-Tune can be started just by performing two
steps. If changes are needed, then they must be made before starting Auto-Tune.
DISPLAY
F
PARAMETER
tYpE
Input Type
FLtr
Digital Filtering
CHYS
On/Off Control
Hysteresis
tcod
Auto-Tune Code
db-2
Deadband
tUnE
Auto-Tune Access
FACTORY
SETTING
AUTO-TUNE CODE FIGURE
AUTO-TUNE OPERATION
(REVERSE ACTING)
MODULE
tc- T16
Curr P16
1
2 T16
0.2 P16
[0]
1-IN
[0]
5-O2
[HidE]
3-LC
1-IN
2-OP
2-OP
1. Enter the Setpoint value in the Display Loop.
2. Initiate Auto-Tune by changing Auto-Tune Start tUNE to YES in the Hidden
Loop.
Auto-Tune Progress
The controller will oscillate the controlling output(s) for four cycles. The
bottom display will flash the cycle phase number. Parameter viewing is
permitted during Auto-Tune. The time to complete the Auto-Tune cycles is
process dependent. The controller should automatically stop Auto-Tune and
store the calculated values when the four cycles are complete. If the controller
remains in Auto-Tune unusually long, there may be a process problem. AutoTune may be stopped by entering NO in Auto-Tune Start tUNE.
562
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PID Adjustments
In some applications, it may be necessary to fine tune the Auto-Tune
calculated PID parameters. To do this, a chart recorder or data logging device is
needed to provide a visual means of analyzing the process. Compare the actual
process response to the PID response figures with a step change to the process.
Make changes to the PID parameters in no more than 20% increments from the
starting value and allow the process sufficient time to stabilize before evaluating
the effects of the new parameter settings.
In some unusual cases, the Auto-Tune function may not yield acceptable
control results or induced oscillations may cause system problems. In these
applications, Manual Tuning is an alternative.
PROCESS RESPONSE EXTREMES
MANUAL TUNING
A chart recorder or data logging device is necessary to measure the time
between process cycles. This procedure is an alternative to the controller’s AutoTune function. It will not provide acceptable results if system problems exist.
1. Set the Proportional Band (ProP) to 10.0% for temperature models (T16) and
100.0% for process models (P16).
2. Set both the Integral Time (Intt) and Derivative Time (dErt) to 0 seconds.
3. Set the Output Dampening Time (OPdP) in Output Module 2-OP to 0 seconds.
4. Set the Output Cycle Time [CYCt] in Output Module 2-OP to no higher than
one-tenth of the process time constant (when applicable).
5. Place the controller in Manual USEr Control Mode trnF in the Hidden Loop
and adjust the % Power to drive the process value to the Setpoint value.
Allow the process to stabilize after setting the % Power. Note: trnF must be
set to HidE in Parameter Lockouts Module 3-LC.
6. Place the controller in Automatic (Auto) Control Mode trnF in the Hidden
Loop. If the process will not stabilize and starts to oscillate, set the
Proportional Band two times higher and go back to Step 5.
7. If the process is stable, decrease Proportional Band setting by two times and
change the Setpoint value a small amount to excite the process. Continue
with this step until the process oscillates in a continuous nature.
8. Fix the Proportional Band to three times the setting that caused the oscillation
in Step 7.
9. Set the Integral Time to two times the period of the oscillation.
10. Set the Derivative Time to 1/8 (0.125) of the Integral Time.
11. Set the Output Dampening Time to 1/40 (0.025) the period of the oscillation.
1-717-767-6511
F
563
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PARAMETER VALUE CHART
Programmer:______________________Date:_________
Controller Number:_______ Security Code:_______
DISPLAY LOOP
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
SETPOINT VALUE SP1
SP
SP
OP
ProP *
SETPOINT VALUE SP2
Intt *
INTEGRAL TIME
OUTPUT POWER PERCENT
PROPORTIONAL BAND
* DERIVATIVE TIME
dErt
AL-1 *
AL-2 *
ALARM 1 VALUE
ALARM 2 VALUE
OUTPUT MODULE (2-OP)
FACTORY SETTING
USER SETTING
0 T16
0.0 P16
20 T16
2.0 P16
0.0
4.0 T16
100.0 P16
120 T16
40 P16
30 T16
4 P16
0
0
* Factory Setting places these parameters in the Hidden Loop (set to
Lockout Module 3-LC.
HidE in
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
CYCt
OPAC
OPLO
OPHI
OPFL
OPdP
CYCLE TIME
CHYS
tcod
AntP
ANAS
ANUt
ANLO
ANHI
ON/OFF CONTROL HYSTERESIS
CONTROL ACTION
OUTPUT POWER LOWER LIMIT
OUTPUT POWER UPPER LIMIT
SENSOR FAIL POWER PRESET
OUTPUT POWER DAMPENING
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
2.0
rEv
0
100
0
3 T16
1 P16
2 T16
0.2 P16
AUTO-TUNE CODE
ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE
ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT
ANALOG UPDATE TIME
ANALOG LOW SCALING
ANALOG HIGH SCALING
4-20
OP
0
0.0
100.0
HIDDEN LOOP
DISPLAY
SPSL
SPrP
trnF
tUNE
PARAMETER
FACTORY SETTING
SETPOINT SELECT
USER SETTING
SP1
0.0
Auto
NO
SETPOINT RAMP RATE
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AUTO-TUNE START
DISPLAY
INPUT MODULE (1-IN ) T16 ONLY
DISPLAY
tYPE
SCAL
dCPt
FLtr
SHFt
SPLO
SPHI
InPt
F1In
PARAMETER
FACTORY SETTING
INPUT TYPE
USER SETTING
tc°F
0
1
0
0
9999
PLOC
NONE
TEMPERATURE SCALE
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
DIGITAL FILTERING
SHIFT/OFFSET
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
USER INPUT FUNCTION
F1 KEY FUNCTION
F
tYPE
PCt
dCPt
rnd
FLtr
dSP1
InP1
dSP2
InP2
SPLO
SPHI
InPt
F1In
564
PARAMETER
INPUT TYPE
PERCENT ANNUNCIATOR
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
ROUNDING INCREMENT
DIGITAL FILTERING
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING 1
INPUT VALUE SCALING 1
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING 2
INPUT VALUE SCALING 2
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
USER INPUT FUNCTION
F1 KEY FUNCTION
FACTORY SETTING
Curr
NO
0.0
0.1
1
0.0
4.00
100.0
20.00
0.0
999.9
SP
OP
PId
AL
CodE
SPSL
SPrP
trnF
tUNE
ALrS
PARAMETER
SETPOINT ACCESS
OUTPUT POWER ACCESS
PID VALUE ACCESS
ALARM VALUE ACCESS
ACCESS CODE
SETPOINT SELECT ACCESS
SETPOINT RAMP ACCESS
TRANSFER CONTROL ACCESS
AUTO-TUNE ACCESS
RESET ALARMS ACCESS
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
dISP
dISP
HIdE
HIdE
0
LOC
HIdE
LOC
HIdE
LOC
ALARM MODULE (4-AL)
DISPLAY
INPUT MODULE (1-IN ) P16 ONLY
DISPLAY
LOCKOUT MODULE (3-LC)
USER SETTING
ACt1
Lit1
rSt1
Stb1
AL-1
ACt2
Lit2
rSt2
Stb2
AL-2
AHYS
PARAMETER
ALARM 1 ACTION
ALARM 1 ANNUNCIATOR
ALARM 1 RESET MODE
ALARM 1 STANDBY
ALARM 1 VALUE
ALARM 2 ACTION
ALARM 2 ANNUNCIATOR
ALARM 2 RESET MODE
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
AuHI
nor
Auto
NO
0
AuHI
nor
Auto
ALARM 2 STANDBY
ALARM 2 VALUE
ALARM 1 & 2 HYSTERESIS
0
1 T16
0.1 P16
COOLING MODULE (5-O2)
DISPLAY
CYC2
GAN2
db-2
PARAMETER
CYCLE TIME
RELATIVE GAIN
DEADBAND
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
2.0
1.0
0
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ª
HIDDEN
LOOP
«
Percent
Symbol
Heat/Cool
Deadband/Overlap
Cooling
Relative Gain
1-717-767-6511
Factory
Service Code
Cooling
Cycle Time
Alarm 1
Value
Alarm 1
Standby
Alarm 1
Action
Alarm 1
Reset Mode
Output
Power
Access
Alarm 1
Annunciator
Analog Low
Scaling
Alarm 2
Standby
Alarm 2
Annunciator
Alarm 2
Action
Alarm 2
Reset Mode
Setpoint
Ramp Rate
Access
Setpoint
Select
Access
Analog High
Scaling
On/Off Control
Hysteresis
Alarm 2
Value
Alarm 1 & 2
Hysteresis
Reset Alarms
Access
- T16 only
- P16 only
Auto-Tune
Auto/Manual
Off/On Access
Transfer
Access
Auto-Tune
Code
F1 Key
Function
Input
Value 1
Advances to the next
module, then changes
parameter selection/value.
Display
Value 1
User Input
Function
Output Power
Dampening
Setpoint
High Limit
Sensor Fail
Power Preset
Access
Code
Analog Output
Update Time
Output Power
High Limit
Setpoint
Low Limit
Rounding
Increment
Alarm
Values
Access
Analog Output
Assignment
Decimal
Resolution
Shift/Offset
Output Power
Low Limit
Input
Value 2
Temp
Scale
Digital
Filtering
Enters displayed module,
then advances to the next
parameter.
PID
Values
Access
Analog
Output Range
Control
Action
Display
Value 2
Ends and returns to
start of Display Loop.
Parameter availability is model and program dependent.
Setpoint
Access
Cycle
Time
Input
Type
DISPLAY
LOOP
T16 & P16 PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
F
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
565
MODEL T48 - 1/16 DIN TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
ACCEPTS 10 TYPES OF SENSOR INPUTS (Thermocouple or RTD)
OPTIONAL HEATER CURRENT MONITOR AND HEATER BREAK
ALARM
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS
OPTIONAL TWO LINEAR DC OUTPUTS (0 to 10 V, 0/4 to 20 mA)
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
OPTIONAL TRIAC OUTPUT
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (Digital) FOR ADDED FLEXIBILITY
SECOND SETPOINT SETTING
SENSOR ERROR COMPENSATION (Offset) AND BREAK
DETECTION
OPTIONAL REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT (0/4 to 20 mA)
HEATING AND OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUTS
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
UL Recognized Component,
File # E156876
FIELD REPLACEABLE OUTPUT BOARD
(Relay or Logic/SSR Drive)
DESCRIPTION
F
The T48 Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature sensors
(thermocouple or RTD elements), precisely displays the process temperature,
and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional or linear DC)
to maintain the process at the desired temperature. The controller’s
comprehensive yet simple programming allows it to meet a wide variety of
application requirements.
The controller operates in the PID control mode for both heating and cooling,
with on-demand auto-tune, which will establish the tuning constants. The PID
tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator at any time and then locked
out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, which allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in the manual mode, providing
the operator with direct control of the output. The controller may also be
programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode with adjustable hysteresis.
A second setpoint is available on select models to allow quick selection of a
different setpoint setting.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. On many models the main control output and the alarm outputs
are field replaceable.
Optional alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of actions
(Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT, and Heater Current
Break) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during
power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside the alarm region. The second
alarm can be configured as a secondary PID output (heat/cool applications).
Optional Main Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) can be used for control or
temperature re-transmission purposes. Programmable output update time
reduces valve or actuator activity. The output range can be scaled independent
of the input range.
Optional Second Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) provides an independent
temperature re-transmission, while the main Linear DC output is being used for
control. The output range can be scaled independent of the input range.
Optional Heater Current Monitor provides a direct readout of process heater
current. An alarm can be programmed to signal when the heater has failed. This
provides early warning of system failure before product quality is affected.
Optional Remote Setpoint input (0/4 to 20 mA) allows for cascade control
loops, where tighter control is required; and allows for remotely driven setpoint
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT
566
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
signal from computers or other similar equipment. Straightforward end point
scaling with independent filtering and local/remote transfer option expand the
controller’s flexibility.
The optional RS485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a T48 and other compatible equipment such as a
printer, PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to
thirty-two), the address number of each T48 on the line can be programmed
from 0 to 99. Data from the T48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. PC software, SFCRM, allows for easy configuration of
controller parameters. These settings can be saved to disk for later use or used
for multi-controller down loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern
surface-mount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise
interference makes the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.
Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C (±1.5°C max), error over 0
to 50°C max. ambient temperature range. Defeated for Linear mV
indication mode.
Resolution: 1° for all types, or 0.1° for T, E, J, K, and N only.
TC TYPE
T
E
J
K
R
S
B
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the T48 to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators not
equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.
N
mV
RTD TYPE
385
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
when
when
392
OHMS
DV
O1
A1
A2
BS 1843
blue (+)
red (-)
violet (+)
red (-)
white (+)
red (-)
yellow (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
grey (+)
red (-)
orange (+)
red (-)
no standard
white (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
yellow (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
no standard
orange (+)
blue (-)
no standard
RANGE
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0
8. INDICATION ACCURACY: ±(0.3% of Span +1°C.) includes NIST
conformity, cold junction effect and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
min. warm-up.
9. USER INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1 MΩ).
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 V max., VIH = 3.65 V min.,
IOFF = 1μA max.
Response Time: 120 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Enable
Reset Alarms
Setpoint 1/Setpoint 2 Select
Local/Remote Setpoint Select Serial block print
measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
LED Status Annunciators:
%P
MN
-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to +750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to 3214°F
+149 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to +56.00
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
7. RTD INPUT: 2 or 3 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.0039162
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max. per input lead
SPECIFICATIONS
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”
“...”
“-..”
RANGE
- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
On: Local Setpoint (Remote Setpoint option)
Off: Remote Setpoint
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error) from
temperature setpoint or shows heater current.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active (for A1 option.).
- Alarm #2 is active OR
- Cooling output (O2) is active
2. POWER:
AC Versions: 85 VAC min. to 250 VAC max., 50 to 60 Hz, 8 VA max.
DC Versions:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 7 W
AC Power: 24 VAC ± 10%; 50 to 60 Hz, 9 VA
3. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modification and setup of
controller functions and one external input user for parameter lockout or
other functions.
4. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2 PROM retains all programmable parameters and
values.
5. MAIN SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within 99% of
final value w/step input; typically, response is limited to response time of
probe)
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.)
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC max. for 15 seconds max.
6. THERMOCOUPLE INPUT:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV, software selectable
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ all types
Lead resistance effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
10. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS: (Heating, Cooling or Alarm)
Relay outputs with Form A contacts:
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load)
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life
expectancy.)
Logic/SSR Drive Outputs:
Rating: 45 mA @ 4 V min., 7 V nominal
Triac Outputs:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Offstate Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal transient snubber
11. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or Linear DC
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
12. ALARMS: 1 or 2 alarms (optional)
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
1-717-767-6511
F
567
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Heater break alarm
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Probe Break Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “A1”, “A2”
13. COOLING: Software selectable (overrides alarm 2)
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time Proportioning
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
14. MAIN AND SECOND LINEAR DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Main: Control or Re-transmission, programmable update rate from 0.1 sec to
250 sec
Second: Re-transmission only, fixed update rate of 0.1 sec
OUTPUT **
RANGE
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
F
ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY *
(0 to 50°C)
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
10k ohm min.
1/3500
500 ohm max.
1/3500
500 ohm max.
1/2800
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. Output
accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an 18 to 28°C range at 10
to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C range at 0 to 85%
RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the wide temperature
range reflects the temperature coeffecient of the internal circuitry.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 10% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
15. REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT: (optional)
Input type:
0/4 to 20 mA
Input Resistance: 10 Ω
Overrange: -5% to 105%
Overload: 100 mA (continuous)
Scale Range: -999 to 9999 degrees or -99.9 to 999.9 degrees.
Resolution: 1 part in 10,000.
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.1 % of full scale +½ LSD)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(0.2% of full scale +½ LSD)
Reading Rate: 10/sec.
Setpoint Filtering: Programmable Digital
Setpoint Ramping: Programmable, 0.1 to 999.9 degrees/minute.
16. HEATER CURRENT MONITOR INPUT: (optional)
Type: Single phase, full wave monitoring of load currents controlled by main
output (01).
Input: 100 mA AC output from current transformer (RLC #CT004001) or
any CT with 100 mA AC output.
Display Scale Range: 1.0 to 999.9 Amps or 0.0 to 100.0%
Input Resistance: 5 Ω
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.5 % of full scale +½ LSD), (5 to 100% of Range)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(1.0% of full scale +½ LSD), (5 to 100% of Range)
Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz.
Alarm Mode: Dual acting; heater element fail detect and control device fail
detect.
Overrange: 105% Capacity
Overload: 200 mA (continuous).
17. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS: (optional)
Type: RS485 multipoint, balanced interface
Baud Rate: 300 to 9600
Data Format: 7O1, 7E1, 7N2, 8N1
Node Address: 0-99, max of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 2-100 msec or 100-200 msec
Data Encoding: ASCII
Isolation w.r.t Main Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min. (50 V working)
Not isolated w.r.t. Remote Setpoint or Heater Current inputs, or Analog
Output common
Note: RS485 and the Analog Output commons are not internally isolated
within the controller. The terminating equipment of these outputs must not
share the same common (ie. earth ground).
568
18. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (max.): 130 ppm/°C, main input
Zero Drift (max.): 1μV/°C, main input
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. relative humidity (non-condensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
19. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all Inputs and outputs: 250 V working (2300 V for
1 minute).
Main input with respect to Analog Outputs, Remote Setpoint Input,
Heater Current Input: 50 V working (2300 V for 1 minute).
All other inputs and outputs with respect to relay contacts: 2000 VAC
Not isolated between Analog Outputs, Remote Setpoint and Heater Current
commons.
20. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1369-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50224-040396
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. No loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m.
Unit is panel mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) that provides at least 20 dB shielding effectiveness. Metal
panel is connected to earth ground.
Power Line and I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent.
OR
Install 2 ferrite cores, RLC#FCOR0000 or equivalent, to AC lines at
unit for frequencies above 5 MHz.
I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
21. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
22. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch. Panel
latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking. One piece
tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be removed from the
case to change the output board without removing the case from the panel or
disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use,
when properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
23. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
BASIC OPERATION
The T48 controls a process temperature by measuring the temperature via an
input probe, then calculating a control output power value by use of a modified
PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power
value to keep the process temperature at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
temperature overshoot from process disturbances.
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the process temperature
in the upper display. One of the following parameters can be viewed in the
lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Temperature Deviation
- Heater Current
- Temperature symbol (F or C)
- Blank Display
The user scrolls through these parameters by pressing the D button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the P button
and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then entered
by the P button, which advances the user to the next parameter. Pressing the D
button immediately returns the controller to the normal operating mode without
changing the currently selected parameter.
HARDWARE FEATURES
A fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent temperature control.
Measurement accuracy of 0.3% of span ±1°C or better, provides close process
control conforming to the desired control setpoint value. The T48 accepts a
variety of both thermocouple and RTD temperature probes. An output board
contains the Main Control output, Alarm 1 output, Alarm 2/Cooling output,
and/or Linear DC output. Since the controller is serviceable from the front of
the panel, the output board (on some models) may be easily changed or replaced
without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No re-programming is required
when changing or replacing the output board for units without the Linear DC
output option. Units with the linear output option require calibration procedure
for the new linear output.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.
A Second Linear DC output is dedicated for retransmission of input
temperature. The output can be scaled and converted independent of the input
and Main Linear DC output. This output is isolated from the input.
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
A second setpoint value can be programmed which can be made active by a
user input and/or through the front panel on selected models.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
thermal shock to the process and helps to minimize temperature overshoot.
INPUT FEATURES
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide better
temperature control. A programmable temperature shift function can be used to
compensate for probe errors or to have multiple T48 units indicate the same
nominal temperature.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), transfer to
second setpoint, etc.
OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection,
for fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). Programmable output cycle time,
output hysteresis and dampening can reduce output activity without degrading
control accuracy. The main outputs can operate in PID, ON/OFF, or manual
control modes.
CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS
In addition to the Linear DC outputs, there are up to three types of ON/OFF
outputs.These outputs can be relay, logic, or triac for control or alarm purposes.
Relay outputs can switch user applied AC or DC voltages. Logic/SSR drive
outputs supply power to external SSR power units. One Logic/SSR Drive
output can control up to four SSR power units at one time. The Triac output
supplies one Amp of AC current for control of an external AC relay or triac
device.
AUTO-TUNE
REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT
The remote setpoint input facilitates the use of a remote signal to drive the
controller’s setpoint. The remote signal can be scaled independent to that of the
controller’s range. The controller’s response to local/remote setpoint transfers
can be programmed. Also, the remote signal is filtered by use of an adaptive
filter. With this filter, relatively large filtering time constants can be used
without suffering from long settling times. The time constant and filter disable
band are programmable. Additionally, the remote signal can also be velocity
limited (or ramped) to slow the controller’s response to changes in setpoint.
This results in a steady control response with no overshoot.
HEATER CURRENT MONITOR
The T48 provides a direct readout of process heater current. This provides
valuable information regarding single phase heater system integrity. It is
especially useful on extruder and large oven applications where adjacent
controllers mask the effect of a failed heater. The heater break alarm senses two
types of heater system faults:
1) Main control output is “on” and heater current is below alarm value. This
indicates failed heater or failed parts of heater, breaker trip, failed power
control device, etc.
2) Main control output is “off” and heater current is above 10% of alarm value.
This indicates a failed power control device, wiring fault, etc.
The T48 has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into non-volatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.
RS485 Communications
F
The RS485 communications option allows the connection of up to 32 devices
on a single pair of wires with a distance of up to 4,000 feet and a maximum
baud rate of 9600. Since the same pair of wires are used for both transmit and
receive, only one way communication is possible at any given time. The
controller has a programmable response time to allow the host device adequate
time to release the communication line for a transmission.
Selected parameters from the T48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. It is also possible to invoke Auto-tune through the serial port.
Serial communications used with SFCRM software allows for easy controller
parameter configuration by computer.
HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUTS
The Main Linear DC output has independent scaling, programmable output
update time and filter (damping) time. These parameters permit flexibility in
process configuration. The output can be set for 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA ranges, and can be configured for control or for transmission of
temperature or setpoint values.
The T48 is available with dual outputs to provide heating and cooling to
those processes that require them. For example, many extruder applications
require both heating and cooling to maintain accurate extruder barrel and die
temperatures. The T48 is easily configured for these types of applications.
1-717-767-6511
569
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Configuration 2, Outputs (2-OP) *
Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial set-up.
The following four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any
required user-interface level:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
UNPROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
The Unprotected Parameters Mode is accessible from the Normal Display
Mode when program disable is inactive or when the proper access code number
from the Protected Parameter Mode is entered. The Configuration Parameter
Modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
-
Enter setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select configuration access point
Return to normal display mode
PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
The Protected Parameters Mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the Configuration Parameter Modes without the
proper access code number. Only the parameters that are enabled in the
Configuration 3 parameter (lock-out section) can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
-
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter value to access unprotected parameters and
configuration parameters
HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *
The Hidden Function Mode is accessible from the Normal Display Mode.
The functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section).
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”
-
Select local (SP1 or SP2) or remote setpoint
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and manual control
Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
Reset latched alarms
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
F
The Configuration Parameter Mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the Configuration Access
Point, allowing the user to return to the Normal Display Mode.
Configuration 1, Inputs (1-IN)
“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
-
Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select level of input filtering
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcOd”
“ANtP”
“ANAS”
“ANut”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
-
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select output control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Main Linear DC analog output range
Main Linear DC analog output source
Main Linear DC analog output update time
Main Linear DC analog output scaling low
Main Linear DC analog output scaling high
Configuration 3, Parameter Lock-Outs (3-LC) *
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“Hcur”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
-
Select setpoint access level
Select power access level
Enable deviation display
Enable heater current display
Enable temperature scale display
Enter parameter access code
Select PID access level
Select alarm access level
Enable alarm reset access
Enable local/remote selection
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation
Configuration 4, Alarms (4-AL) *
“ACt1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“ACt2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
-
Select operation mode of alarm #1, or select heat output
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2, or select cooling output
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
Configuration 5, Cooling (5-O2) *
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap
Configuration 6, Serial Communications (6-SC) *
“bAUd”
“ConF”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PoPt”
-
Select baud rate
Select character frame format
Enter address
Select abbreviated or full transmission
Select print options
Configuration 7, Remote Setpoint Input (7-N2) *
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“FLtr”
“bAnd”
“trnF”
-
Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint filter time constant
Enter remote setpoint filter disable band
Select Local/Remote setpoint transfer response
Configuration 7 - Heater Current Parameters (7-N2) *
“Hcur”
- Enter full scale rating of CT
Configuration 8, Second Linear DC Analog Output (8-A2) *
“A2tP”
“A2LO”
“A2HI”
- Second linear DC analog range
- Second linear DC analog scaling low
- Second linear DC analog scaling high
Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations (9-FS)
“Code 48”
“Code 66”
- Calibrate Instrument
- Reset parameters to factory setting
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
570
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
The T48 is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing
from center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is the
same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
VERTICAL UNIT STACKING
ACCESSORY - EXTERNAL SSR POWER UNIT
The external SSR Power Unit is used with T48s equipped with Logic/SSR
Drive outputs to switch loads up to 240 VAC @ 45 Amps, 25°C ambient. The
unit is operated by applying a low level DC control signal to the isolated
input. The unit features zero cross detection circuits which reduces radiated
RFI when switching load currents. With no contacts to wear out, the SSR
Power Unit provides virtually limitless operational life. The unit is supplied
with an integral heat sink for immediate installation.
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING
PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.
ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER-50 A
The external Current Transformer is used when specifying the T48s
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor.
External SSR Power Unit:
Part Number: RLY50000
Switched Voltage Range: 50 to 280 VAC
Load Current: 45 Amps max. @ 25°C ambient temperature
35 Amps max. @ 50°C ambient temperature
On State Input: 3 to 32 VDC @ 1500 Ω impedance. (isolated)
(Use Logic/SSR drive output.)
Off State Input: 0.0 to 1.0 VDC
Size: 5.5" (14 cm) L x 4.75" (12 cm) W x 2.62" (6.6 cm) H
ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER-40 A
The external Current Transformer is used when specifying the T48s
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor.
F
Part Number: CT005001
Current Ratio: 50 : 0.1 (Amperes)
Operation Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Insulation Class: 0.6 KV BIL, 10 KV full wave.
Terminals: Brass studs No. 8-32 UNC with flat washer and hex nuts.
Window Diameter: 1.13" (28.7 mm)
Weight: 8 oz (226.0 g)
Current Transformers:
Part Number: CT004001
Current Ratio: 40 : 0.1 (Amperes)
Max Heater Current: 50 A
Dielectric Strength: 1000 VAC (For 1 minute)
Vibration Resistance: 50 Hz (Approx 10 G)
Terminals: Solder Type
Window Diameter: 0.228" (5.8 mm)
Weight: 0.406 oz (11.5 g)
1-717-767-6511
571
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
APPLICATION
(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)
PLASTICS EXTRUDER APPLICATION
Several T48 controllers are employed to control the
temperature of a plastics extruder. Each T48 controls a
heating element and a cooling water solenoid to maintain
each extruder zone at the desired temperature. The Heater
Current Monitor option is used to provide a readout of the
heater current. The multi-function User Input can be
programmed to allow selection of manual operation when
connected to common. This allows the user to hold the
control output of the controller during abnormal process
conditions.
OEM PAINT SPRAYER APPLICATION
An OEM manufacturing spray painting equipment utilizes
the T48 to maintain optimum paint temperature. In addition to
the low cost, the 1/16 DIN package size permits the OEM to
design temperature control into various sized painting
equipment, from small hand sprayers to large paint booths. The
heating element used to heat the paint, is connected to the Main
Control Output (OP1) programmed for On/Off control. Alarm 1
is programmed as Band Inside Acting, so that as long as the
paint temperature is within manufacturer’s specifications for
temperature, the “GO” light is on. Alarm 2 is programmed as
Band Outside acting so that the “NO GO” light is lit when the
paint temperature is more than 12° outside the manufacturer’s
specifications of 140 to 150°F.
(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)
MULTIPLE UNIT/REMOTE SETPOINT APPLICATION
Eight T48 controllers are used in a drying oven. Each T48 controls a zone
within the oven. Depending upon the material to be dried, and its initial
moisture content, the drying setpoint temperature varies. A master T48
controller transmits setpoint via linear DC output. This signal is received as
a remote setpoint signal by the other slave controllers.
Whenever the master controller’s setpoint is changed, the slave controller’s
setpoint changes automatically.
The remote setpoint input at each slave controller can be scaled
independently.
F
(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)
572
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
Options and Output Boards are factory configured per the part number specified. Part numbers without
replacement output boards listed must be returned to the factory for output board replacement.
MODELS WITHOUT RS485 AND LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUT
DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
01 OUTPUT
DEDICATED
ALARM 1
A1 OUTPUT
(ALARM 2)
A2 OR 02
(COOL)*
REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @
HEATER
CURRENT
INPUT @
REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT
BOARD
18-36 VDC/24 VAC
85 TO 250 VAC
RBD48100
T4810010
T4810000
RBD48111
NA
T4811000
RBD48111
T4811110
T4811100
RBD48111
T4811113
T4811103
RBD48111
T4811114
T4811104
RBD48200
T4820010
T4820000
RBD48211
NA
T4821000
RBD48211
T4821110
T4821100
RBD48211
T4821113
T4821103
RBD48211
T4821114
T4821104
NA
T4832210
T4832200
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
YES
YES
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Relay
Logic/SSR
Relay
Relay
Logic/SSR
Relay
Relay
Logic/SSR
Relay
Relay
Triac
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
YES
YES
PART NUMBERS
* - This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
@ - These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
Option Boards are installed at the factory for the appropriate models. These boards are only needed for field replacement.
MODELS WITH RS485 OR LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUT
DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
O1 OUTPUT
MAIN CONTROL
O1 OR A1
(ALARM 1) *
DEDICATED
ALARM 1
A1 OUTPUT
(ALARM 2)
A2 OR O2
(COOL) *
REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @
HEATER
CURRENT
INPUT @
Relay
RS485
@
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
NA
T4810002
T481010A
YES
T4810111
T4810101
YES
T4810115
T4810105
YES
T4810116
T4810106
YES
T4810117
T4810107
YES
T4810118
T4810108
YES
T4810119
T4810109
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR
Relay
YES
YES
YES
YES
Relay
Logic/SSR
1
YES
YES
2
T4811102
YES
T4820211
T4820201
YES
T4820215
T4820205
YES
T4820216
T4820206
YES
T4820218
T4820208
YES
T4820219
T4820209
YES
T4821112
T4821102
YES
YES
YES
Relay
YES
T4811112
YES
YES
SECOND
PART NUMBERS
ANALOG
OUTPUT** @ 18-36 VDC/24 VAC 85 TO 250 VAC
T481011A
YES
Relay
MAIN
ANALOG
OUTPUT** @
* - This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
** - This output is jumper and program selectable for either a current or voltage Linear DC output.
@ - These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
- Replacement Output Board RBD48100 may be used.
2
- Replacement Output Board RBD48111 may be used.
1
F
ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
External SSR Power Unit (for Logic/SSR output models)
RLY
CT
SFCRM
RLY50000
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
RLY60000
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
RLY6A000
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount SSR
RLY70000
40 Ampere Current Transformer (for Heater Current Input models)
CT004001
50 Ampere Current Transformer (for Heater Current Input models)
CT005001
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for RS485 models)
SFCRM
ICM4
RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module
ICM40030
ICM5
Three way isolated RS232/RS485 Serial Converter
ICM50000
* Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net
1-717-767-6511
573
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL TCU - TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNIT
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
FULL PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (USES OUTPUT MODULES)
OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUT (USES OUTPUT MODULE)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR TEMPERATURE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL HEATER CURRENT MONITOR AND BREAK ALARM
OPTIONAL MOTORIZED VALVE POSITION CONTROL AND
VALVE FAIL ALARM
OPTIONAL SECOND ANALOG INPUT FOR REMOTE SETPOINT
AND CASCADE CONTROL
UL
C
R
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
US LISTED
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (DIGITAL) FOR ADDED
FLEXIBILITY
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
100 msec SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT, SECOND ANALOG INPUT OR
HEATER CURRENT
ACCEPTS 10 DIFFERENT TYPES OF SENSOR INPUTS
(Thermocouple or RTD)
SENSOR ERROR COMPENSATION (Slope and Offset) AND
BREAK DETECTION
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC AND LOCAL/REMOTE SETPOINT
CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR Drive and Triac)
DESCRIPTION
F
The TCU Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature sensors
(thermocouple or RTD elements), precisely displays the process temperature,
and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional or linear) to
maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set of easy to
use steps allows the controller to solve various application requirements.
The controller can operate in the PID control mode for both heating and
cooling, with on-demand auto-tune, which will establish the tuning constants.
The PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator at any time and then
locked out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, which allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in the manual mode, providing
the operator with direct control of the output. The controller may also be
programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode with adjustable hysteresis.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. Replaceable and interchangeable output modules (relay, SSR
drive, or triac) can be installed for the main control output, alarm output(s) and
cooling output.
Optional dual alarms can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT, Heater
Break and Valve Fail Detect) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature
suppresses the output during power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside
the alarm region. An optional secondary output is available (for processes that
require cooling) which provides increased control accuracy and response.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
574
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
OPTIONS
A linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to interface
with actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The output signal
can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following: % output
power, process temperature value, process temperature value deviation or
setpoint value. For Linear DC control applications, the adjustable output
demand dampening, output deadband and output update time parameters
expand the versatility of the TCU with final control devices.
The optional Heater Current Monitor serves as a digital ammeter for heater
current monitoring. Current transformer accessory (CT005001), is required. An
alarm event output can be programmed to signal when the heater or heater
control devices have failed, before damage to process material occurs. The
Heater Break alarm triggers under two conditions:
1) The main output (OP1) is “on” and the heater current is below the heater
current alarm value, indicating an aged or failed heater.
2) Output (OP1) is “off” and the heater current is more than 10% of the alarm
value, indicating a shorted heater control device or other problem.
The optional Motorized Valve Positioner directly controls the position of a
valve by the use of twin outputs (open and close) to control the direction of
motor rotation. The motor position defines the opening position of the valve.
Two control modes are possible: position control, which makes use of the
slidewire feedback signal supplied with the positioner and velocity control, in
which no slidewire feedback signal is used. Parameters are provided to adjust
the operation of the valve. These include:
Valve activity hysteresis
Valve update time
Variable control dampening
Slidewire signal fail action
Adjustable valve position limits.
The valve positioner TCU achieves tight process control, yet minimizes
unnecessary valve activity. An alarm event output or display alarm can be
programmed under loss of slidewire feedback or under valve fail detection.
The optional Second Analog Input (0-20 mA DC) can be configured as a
remote setpoint signal or as a secondary process signal. Configuration of the
second analog input as a remote setpoint signal allows ratio control, master
setpoint/multiple slave operation, and the ability to cascade the TCU with
another controller (external cascade). Configuration of the second input as a
secondary process signal allows operation as a two-process cascade controller
within a single unit (internal cascade). In either control mode, parameters are
provided to scale, configure, communicate and monitor the activity of both
analog inputs. A square law linearizer function can be used to linearize signals
derived from flow transmitters.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communication interface provides twoway communication between a TCU unit and other compatible equipment such
as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In multipoint
applications the address number of each unit on the line can be programmed from
0-99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair of wires. The
Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be interrogated or
changed by sending the proper command code via serial communications. Alarm
output(s) may also be reset via the serial communications interface option.
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for wash down and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount
technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference makes
the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the TCU to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls model IMT (thermocouple) or model IMR (RTD) units may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages (Model dependent):
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
loss of slidewire signal is detected.
valve actuator error is detected.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect, 48
to 62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
LED Backlight Status Indicators (Model dependent):
%PW
DEV
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
OPN
CLS
CUR
SEC
MAN
REM
- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error)
from temperature setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Cooling output is active (for Cooling Option).
- Valve positioner OPEN output is active
(for Valve Positioner option).
- Valve positioner CLOSE output is active
(for Valve Positioner option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows heater current
(for Heater Current Monitor option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows second analog input
(For Second Analog Input option).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
- ON: controller is in remote setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input option).
- OFF: controller is in local setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input option).
- Flashing: controller is in Manual control mode
(Second Analog Input optional).
4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input for parameter lockout or other
functions.
5. MAIN SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe)
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
DC Linear: Programmable preset output
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 30 seconds.
6. THERMOCOUPLE:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV
Input Impedance: 20 M Ω all types
Lead resistance effect: 20 μV/350 Ω
Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C error over 0 - 50°C ambient
temperature range. Disabled for Linear mV type.
Resolution: 1°C/F all types, or 0.1°C/F for T, E, J, K, and N only.
7. RTD: 2, 3 or 4 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.003916
Excitation: 0.175 mA
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 7 Ω maximum
TC TYPE
SAFETY SUMMARY
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”
“....”
“-...”
“SLid”
“VALV”
T
E
J
K
R
S
B
N
mV
RTD
(385)
RTD
(392)
OHMS
1-717-767-6511
RANGE
ACCURACY
-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to 750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
+200 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to 56.00
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 1.5°C
0.15% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.5°F
0.15% + 1 LSD
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.15% + 1 LSD
WIRE COLOR
(ANSI)
F
blue
violet
white
yellow
black
black
grey
orange
__
__
__
__
575
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
F
8. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Errors include NIST conformity and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
min. warm-up. Thermocouple errors include cold junction effect. Errors are
expressed as ±percent of reading and ± 3/4 LSD unless otherwise noted.
9. OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See Ordering Information.)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA max.
Offstate Leakage Current: 7mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
10. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT (Heating or Cooling):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
11 . COOLING OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
12. LINEAR DC OUTPUT (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA)
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance)
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV)
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or temperature
(Available for heat or cool, but not both.)
13. HEATER CURRENT MONITOR (Optional):
Type: Single phase, full wave monitoring of load currents controlled by main
output (OP1)
Input: 100 mA AC output from current transformer RLC part number
CT005001 or any current transformer with 100 mA AC output
Display Scale Range: 1.0 to 999.9 amperes or 100.0%
Input resistance: 5 Ω
Accuracy: 1% of full scale ±1 LSD (10 to 100% of range)
Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Alarm mode: Dual acting; heater element fail detect and control device fail
detect
Overload: 200 mA (steady state)
Min. output “on” time for Heater break alarm detect: 400 msec
14. MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER (Optional):
Two Outputs: Valve open and valve close or Linear DC (optional)
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Three Inputs: Slidewire feedback, signal fail detect (Isolated from main
input)
Slidewire Resistance: 100 to 100 KΩ
Slidewire Exciting Voltage: 0.9 VDC
Slidewire Fail Action: programmable
Control Mode: Position mode (with slidewire) and velocity mode (w/o
slidewire).
Control Deadband: 1% to 25.0% (position mode)
0.1 to 25.0 seconds (velocity mode)
576
Update Time: 1 to 250 seconds
Motor Time (open, close): 1 to 9999 seconds
Position Limits: Adjustable 0.0 to 100.0% of valve stroke
Valve Fail Time: Off to 9999 seconds
Alarm mode: Dual acting; loss of slidewire feedback signal and valve fail
detection
15. SECOND ANALOG INPUT:
Range: 0 to 20 mA (Isolated from main input)
Overload: 100 mA (steady state)
Input Resistance: 10 Ω
Voltage Drop (@ 20 mA): 0.2 V
Accuracy: 0.15% of reading ±10 μA ±1 LSD
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
16. SERIAL COMMUNICATION:
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit
Unit Address: Programmable from 0 to 99, max. of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs
17. USER INPUT (Optional): Internally pulled up to +5 VDC.
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 3.0 VMIN,
Available on all second input (HCM, MVP & ANA) models, and on models
with RS485.
Response Time: 100 msec max.
Functions: Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
Print Request
Local/Remote Setpoint Select
18. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Heater break
Valve fail
Second Analog Input monitoring
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Probe Break Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with cooling output or motorized valve position option.)
19. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (maximum): 100 ppm/°C, main input; 150 ppm/°C, second input
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. (non-condensing) from 0 to 50°C
Zero Drift (maximum): 1 μV/°C, main input;2 μA/°C, second input
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
20. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
All inputs and outputs with respect to AC line: 2300 V
Analog Outputs, Second Analog Input, Heater Current Input or
Slidewire Input with respect to main input: 500 V
21. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal, Heater Current Monitor input and Motorized
Valve Positioner input signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
a. Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
b. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
22. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block
Wire Range: 12-30 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5-7 inch-lbs (56-79 N-cm)
23. CONSTRUCTION: NEMA 2 For Standard Models.
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included)
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing two captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included). This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
24. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs (0.6 kgs)
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode when making a parameter change. The controller’s
configuration and parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.
HARDWARE FEATURES
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent temperature control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.15% or better, provides closer process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value. One model accepts a variety of both thermocouple
or RTD temperature probes. The AC input power is switch selectable, allowing
the unit to operate from either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the output modules may be easily changed
or replaced without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No re-programming is
required when changing or replacing modules.
The optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes two bezel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when properly installed.
The standard model simply requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two-year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
thermal shock to the process and helps to minimize temperature overshoot.The
setpoint may also be transmitted by the optional linear DC output for slave
control loops.
The second analog input may be configured as a remote setpoint. As such, the
controller is easily switched from local/remote setpoint operation via the front
panel or user input. Ratio and bias parameters provide on-line scaling of the
remote setpoint. Absolute limit values and maximum rate of change of the
remote setpoint further enhance controller flexibility.
INPUT FEATURES
ACCESSORIES:
External SSR Power Unit:
Switched Voltage Range: 50 to 280 VAC (Nominal: 240 VAC)
Load Current: 45 Amps @ 25°C ambient temperature
35 Amps @ 50°C ambient temperature
On State Input: 3 to 32 VDC @ 1500 Ω impedance. (isolated)
(Use Logic/SSR drive output module.)
Off State Input: 0.0 to 1.0 VDC
Size: 5.5" (14 cm) L x 4.75" (12 cm) W x 2.62" (6.6 cm) H
Current Transformer:
Current Ratio: 50:0.1 (Amperes)
Accuracy: ±5.0%
Operating Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Insulation Class: 0.6 Kv BIL 10 Kv full wave
Terminals: Brass studs No. 8-36, (flat washer, washer, nut)
Weight: 8.0 oz (226 g)
Approvals: UL recognized component
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide better
temperature control. A programmable temperature shift and slope function can
be used to compensate for probe errors or to have multiple TCU units indicate
the same nominal temperature.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.
The second analog input has independent scaling parameters to match the
units of other processes or transmitters, or to match the controller’s range.
OUTPUT FEATURES
BASIC OPERATION
The TCU controls a process temperature by measuring the temperature via an
input probe, then calculating a control output power value by use of a modified
PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power
value to keep the process temperature at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
temperature overshoot from process disturbances.
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal operating mode, the unit will display the process temperature
in the upper display. One of six other parameters can be viewed in the lower
display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Temperature Deviation
- Heater Current
- Second Input Process Value
- Temperature Symbol (F or C)
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioningcycle time, and programmable DC linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.
Programmable dampening output hysteresis and output update time parameters
can dramatically reduce actuator activity without degrading control accuracy.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.
F
AUTO-TUNE
The TCU has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.
The six parameters can be scrolled through by pressing the DSP button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
1-717-767-6511
577
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONS
INTERNAL CASCADE
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
The TCU has dual outputs for providing heating and cooling to those
processes that require them. Many extruder applications require both heating
and cooling to maintain accurate extruder barrel and die temperatures. The TCU
is easily configured for these applications.
Cooling Configuration Parameters
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap
HEATER CURRENT MONITOR
Cascade control allows the process to be divided into two control loops: the
primary control loop and the secondary control loop. The secondary loop
receives it’s setpoint from the primary loop to control an intermediate variable
(steam pressure). The control level of the intermediate variable is the input to
the primary process. The primary loop (temperature) controller maintains loop
regulation by manipulating the setpoint of the secondary controller. The
setpoint of the secondary controller, in turn, changes the intermediate variable.
The secondary loop can react faster to disturbances of the intermediate variable,
thereby minimizing the effects to the primary control loop. Control loops
cascaded in such a manner provide greater control quality than would be
possible with single loop control. A single TCU can accomplish two-process
cascade control.
Internal Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPer”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“OPd2”
-
Select cascade mode
Select second input square root linearization
Select second input decimal point
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Output dampening of secondary
Internal Cascade Operational Parameters
The Heater Current Monitor serves as a heater element fail sentry, so
operators can take corrective action before significant process errors occur in
the event of a failure. The actual heater current can be viewed in the secondary
display and/or a heater break alarm output can be programmed.
Heater Current Monitor Configuration Parameters
“HCur”
ACt1”, “ACt2”
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
“It-2”
“dt-2”
-
View secondary setpoint value
Enter secondary proportional band
Enter secondary integral time
Enter secondary derivative time
EXTERNAL CASCADE
- Enter full scale current of current transformer
- Program alarm(s) as heater break alarm
MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER
F
The motorized valve positioner controls the position of a valve directly, by use
of “open” and “close” control outputs. The slidewire feedback signals of the valve
may optionally be connected to the controller. Alternatively, the controller may be
configured for linear input valve control using the 4 to 20 mA DC output.
Motorized Valve Positioner Configuration Parameters
578
Position mode:
“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“Act1”
-
Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Program alarm as valve fail output
Velocity mode:
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VONt”
-
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)
Similar to internal cascade control, external cascade control differs by the
employment of two controllers, one of which is equipped with a second analog
input configured as a remote setpoint. A PCU controls the secondary loop, while
a TCU controls the primary loop.
External Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
-
Select ratio mode
Select second input square root linearization
Select second input decimal point
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Local/Remote select options
External Cascade Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”
- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SETPOINT MASTER CONTROL
Setpoint Master Control allows automatic setpoint changes to slave
controller units (up to 50 units total) from a master TCU controller.
The linear DC output of the master is looped with the second analog
input of the slave TCU controllers. Each slave unit can have unique
remote setpoint ratio and bias values.
Setpoint Slave Configuration Parameters
“OPEr” - Select remote setpoint mode
“root” - Select second input square root
Linearization
“dPt2” - Select second input decimal point
“dSP1” - Enter scaling units of second input
“INP1” - Enter scaling units of second input
“dSP2” - Enter scaling units of second input
“INP2” - Enter scaling units of second input
“SPLO”
- Limit range of remote setpoint
“SPHI”
“SPrP” - Limit rate of change of remote
setpoint
Setpoint Slave Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”
- Second input ratio
- Second input bias
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Configuration 1, Inputs
“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SPAN”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
“HCur”
The TCU has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.
*
-
“Pb-2”
-
“It-2”
-
“dt-2”
-
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
-
Enter Setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter Remote Setpoint ratio value
Enter Remote Setpoint bias value
View internal cascade secondary setpoint
demand
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
Enter internal cascade, secondary
derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select basic configuration mode
Return to normal display mode
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
“ANdb”
“ANUt”
-
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC output low scaling value *
Enter linear DC output high scaling value *
Enter linear DC output control deadband *
Enter linear DC output update time *
Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“IN-2”
“HCur”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“PId2”
“rtbS”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
The configuration parameter mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the configuration selection
stage allowing the user to return to the normal display mode.
Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select level of input filtering
Enter input correction span (slope)
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function *
Enter full scale heater current *
Configuration 2, Outputs
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The unprotected parameter mode is accessible when program disable is
inactive or when the proper access code number from the protected mode is
entered.The configuration parameter modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”
-
-
Configuration 4, Alarms
“Act1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
-
Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Enable deviation display *
Enable second input display *
Enable heater current display
Enable temperature scale display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of secondary PID access *
Select degree of ratio/bias access *
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable alarm reset access *
Enable local/remote setpoint selection *
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation
F
*
Select operation mode of alarm #1
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
Configuration 5, Cooling
*
“CYC2” - Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
“GAN2” - Enter cooling relative gain
“db-2” - Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap
1-717-767-6511
579
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Configuration 6, Serial Communications
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”
-
*
Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included in print-out
Configuration 7, Second Input
Configuration 8, Motorized Valve Positioner
Velocity mode:
“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VONt”
-
The hidden function mode is accessible from the normal operating mode. The
four functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in configuration 3
parameter lock-out section.
“SPSL” - Select Local/Remote Setpoint
“trnF” - Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and manual control
“tUNE” - Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
“ALrS” - Reset latched alarms
*
“OPEr” - Select remote setpoint or internal
cascade mode
“root” - Select second input square root linearization
“dPt2” - Select second input decimal point
“dSP1” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“INP1” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“dSP2” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“INP2” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“SPtr” - Enter local/remote select options
“OPd2” - Enter Secondary output control dampening
Position mode:
HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *
PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
The protected parameters mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access
code number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3
parameter lock-out section can be accessed.
*
Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Enter valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
-
“It-2”
-
“dt-2”
-
“AL-1” “AL-2” “CodE” -
*
Enter Proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter remote setpoint ratio value
Enter remote setpoint bias value
Enter internal cascade, secondary setpoint
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary
integral time
Enter internal cascade, secondary
derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter access value to unprotected
parameters & configuration parameters
These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
ACCESSORY - EXTERNAL SSR POWER UNIT
ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER
The external SSR Power Unit is used with the Logic/SSR Drive Module
(OMD00003) to switch loads up to 240 VAC @ 45 amps, 25°C ambient.
The unit is operated by applying a low level DC control signal to the
isolated input. The unit features zero cross detection circuits which reduces
radiated RFI when switching load currents. With no contacts to wear out,
the SSR Power Unit provides virtually limitless operational life. The unit is
supplied with an integral heat sink for immediate installation.
The external Current Transformer is used when specifying TCUs
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor. The primary current rating is 50
amperes.
F
580
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OUTPUT MODULES
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See ordering information.)
Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 ampere @ 35°C
0.75 ampere @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA maximum.
APPLICATION
Several TCU controllers are
employed to control the temperature of
a plastics extruder. Each TCU controls
a heating element and a cooling water
solenoid to maintain each extruder
zone at a desired temperature. The
heater current monitor of the TCU is
used for early detection of heater
element failure. The linear DC output
is used to retransmit the process
temperature to a control computer for
data logging purposes.
F
1-717-767-6511
581
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELS WITHOUT SECOND INPUT OPTIONS
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
NEMA 4X/P65
BEZEL
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
115/230 VAC
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
TCU00000
NO
NO
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU00001
NO
NO
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU00002
NO
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU01001
NO
YES
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU01004
NO
YES
NO
1
YES
YES
TCU01005
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
TCU10000
YES
NO
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU10001
YES
NO
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU10002
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11001
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU11002
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU11004
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
YES
TCU11005
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
NO
TCU12001
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
YES
TCU12004
YES
NO
YES
1
YES
YES
TCU12005
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type).
As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with
any type of output module.
HEATER CURRENT MONITOR MODELS (HCM)
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
YES
NO
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU10204
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11208
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common
terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output
module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
SECOND ANALOG INPUT MODELS (ANA)
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
YES
NO
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU10104
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11108
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
NO
TCU12108
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared
common terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type
of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER MODELS (MVP)
4 to 20 mA
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
YES
YES
YES
F
04toto10
20 VDC
mA
0 ALARM
to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
COOLING
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
1
1
1
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
TCU10307
TCU11306
TCU12306
ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
Relay Module
Triac Module
Logic/SSR Drive Module
SSR Power Unit
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount SSR
50:0.1 Ampere Current Transformer
40:0.1 Ampere Current Transformer
PART NUMBER
OMD00000
OMD00001
OMD00003
RLY50000
RLY60000
RLY6A000
RLY70000
CT005001
CT004001
Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the
controller, be sure to purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control
Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s), the cooling output, and valve positioner
outputs. The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input
of an SSR power unit. It should never be connected to line voltage.
All output modules are packaged separately and must be installed by the user.
582
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL TSC - TEMPERATURE SETPOINT CONTROLLER
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM DELAY FOR PROFILE CONFORMITY,
PLUS PROGRAM LINKING, REPEATING AND AUTO POWER-ON
FUNCTIONS FOR ENHANCED CAPABILITY
DUAL EVENT OUTPUTS FOR TIMED ACTIVATION OF PROCESS
EQUIPMENT SUCH AS STIRRERS, FANS, HEATERS, ETC. (Uses
Alarm Output Channels)
FOUR SETPOINT & PID PARAMETER SETS FOR QUICK RECALL
OF SETPOINTS AND/OR GAIN VALUES DURING BATCH OR
PROCESS CHANGEOVER
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT FOR CONTROLLER AND
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROL
100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
C
UL
R
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT OR TEMPERATURE AND
PROFILE STATUS
US LISTED
ACCEPTS ANY ONE OF 10 DIFFERENT TYPES OF SENSOR
INPUTS (Thermocouple or RTD)
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROLLER FOR TIME VS.
TEMPERATURE (RAMP/SOAK) AND SPECIAL BATCH/RECIPE
APPLICATIONS
ADVANCED PROGRAM PROFILING IN A 1/8 DIN PACKAGE
ON-LINE MONITORING AND CONTROL OF PROGRAM STATUS,
TIME, AND SETPOINT VALUE (Program Run, Pause, Stop,
Advance, Modify Time, & Setpoint Value)
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR drive, and Triac)
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (Uses Output Modules)
OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUT (Uses Output Module)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR TEMPERATURE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
DESCRIPTION
The TSC is a setpoint controller suitable for time vs. temperature, process
control applications. The TSC accepts signals from a variety of temperature
sensors (thermocouple and RTD elements), precisely displays the process
temperature, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set
of easy to use steps allows the controller to satisfy various applications. The user
input can be programmed to perform a variety of controller functions.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the measured temperature value and
setpoint or temperature and profile status simultaneously. Front panel indicators
inform the operator of controller status and output states. Replaceable output
modules (Relay, logic/SSR drive or Triac) can be fitted to the main control output,
alarm output(s) or timed event output(s), and cooling output.
The TSC has been designed to simplify the set-up and operation of a controlled
setpoint profile program. The setpoint program is easily entered and controlled
through the front panel. Full display capabilities keep the operator informed of the
process temperature, profile status, output states, and setpoint value.
The controller can operate in the standard PID control mode for both heating
or cooling with on-demand auto-tune which establishes the PID gain set. The
PID gain set can be fine tuned by the operator at any time or may be locked from
further modification. The unit can be transferred to the manual control mode
providing the operator with direct control of the output.
The TSC features four programs or profile recipes, each with up to eight
ramp/soak segments, which can be easily stored and executed at any time.
Longer profiles can be achieved by linking one or more profiles together,
creating a single profile of up to 32 ramp/soak segments. Temperature profile
conformity is assured during either soak (hold) phases or both ramp and hold
phases by an adjustable error band parameter. The program repeat function
cycles the profile either continuously or a set number of times. Power-on options
automatically re-start, stop, or resume a running profile. The profile can be
controlled via the front panel buttons, the user input, or the optional serial
communications port.
Four control points, each having a setpoint and PID parameter set, are
available for instant front panel implementation during batch changeover, or
F
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
1-717-767-6511
583
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
other process conditions. A control point may have its PID gain set values
disabled when implementing the control point.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communications interface provides the
capability of two-way communication between a TSC unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In
multipoint applications the address number of each unit on the line can be
programmed from 0-99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
Optional alarm output(s) may be configured to operate as a timed event
output or as a standard alarm output. As an alarm output it may be configured to
activate according to a variety of actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or
LO, or Band IN or OUT) with adjustable hysteresis. Also, a standby feature
suppresses the output(s) on power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside the
alarm region. Timed event output(s) allow the controller to activate other
equipment while a programmed profile is running. Each profile can define up to
16 event states (phases), for each output(s).
An optional secondary output is available for processes that require cooling
which provides increased control accuracy and response.
The optional linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to
interface with final actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The
output signal can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following:
% Output Power
Measurement Value
Measurement Value Deviation
Setpoint Value
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for washdown and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount technology,
extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference, makes the controller
extremely reliable in industrial environments.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the TSC to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls model IMT (thermocouple) or model IMR (RTD) units may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.
Start Mode: Ramps from process temperature.
Program Auto Cycle: 1 to 249, or continuous.
Event Outputs: 2, time activated with profile [uses Alarm output(s)].
Control: Front panel buttons, user input, or RS485 communications.
6. CONTROL POINTS:
Setpoints: 4
PID gain sets: 4
Control: Front panel buttons or user input.
7. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe).
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output.
Display: “OPEN”.
Alarms: Upscale drive.
DC Linear: Programmable preset output.
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 db @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 db, DC to 50/60 Hz.
Protection: Input overload voltage; 240 VAC @ 30 sec max.
8. THERMOCOUPLE:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N or Linear mV.
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ, all types.
Lead Resistance Effect: 20 μV/350 Ω.
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C error over 0-50°C ambient
temperature range. Disabled for linear mV type.
Resolution: 1°C/F all types, or 0.1°C/F for T, E, J, K, and N only.
9. RTD: 2, 3 or 4 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760), alpha =
0.003916
Excitation: 0.175 mA
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 7 Ω max.
10. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Errors include NIST conformity and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
minutes warm-up. Thermocouple errors include cold junction effect. Errors
are expressed as ±(% of reading) and ±3/4 LSD unless otherwise noted.
TC TYPE
T
E
J
K
R
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) Red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) Green LED
Display Messages:
F
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”
“....”
“-...”
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
when
when
S
B
measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only).
display value exceeds + display range.
display value exceeds - display range.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect,
48-62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
6 LED Backlight Status Indicators:
%PW
PGM
-
MAN
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
-
Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
Lower auxiliary display shows profile status or profile
time remaining.
Controller is in manual mode.
Main control output is active.
Alarm #1 is active.
Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option)
Cooling output is active (for Cooling Option).
4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for setup and modification of
controller functions and one external input.
5. SETPOINT PROFILE:
Profiles: 4
Segments Per Profile: 8 ramp/hold segments (linkable to 32 segments).
Ramp Rate: 0.1 to 999.9 degrees/minute or no ramp.
Hold Time: Off or from 0.1 to 999.9 minutes, can be extended to 500 hours
by linking.
Error Band Conformity: Off or from 1 to 9999 degrees deviation, + value
for hold phases, - value for both ramp and hold phases.
Power-On Modes: Stop, auto-start, or profile resume.
584
N
mV
RTD
(385)
RTD
(392)
OHMS
RANGE
ACCURACY
-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to 750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
+200 to +1820°C
+300 to +3300°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to 56.00
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 1.5°C
0.15% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.5°F
0.15% + 1 LSD
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.15% + 1 LSD
WIRE COLOR
(ANSI)
blue
violet
white
yellow
black
black
grey
orange
__
__
__
__
11. OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with RS485 option)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. rating.(Decreasing load and/or
increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Ratings:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max Load Current: 1 AMP @ 35°C
0.75 AMP @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
12. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT (Heating or Cooling):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC.
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Auto-tune: When performed, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable.
13. COOLING OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable.
Heat/Cool DeadBand: Programmable.
14. LINEAR DC DRIVE (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA).
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance).
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV).
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or temperature.
(Available for heat or cool, but not both.)
15. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module.
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Timed event output(s)
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched.
Delay: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Probe Break Action: Upscale.
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with cooling output).
16. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional):
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface.
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300-9600.
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity.
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit.
Unit Address: Programmable from 0-99, max. of 32 units per line.
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common.
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs.
17. USER INPUT: VIN max = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 2.0 VMIN,
Response time 100 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Transfer
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
Print Request
Load Control Point
Run/Hold Profile 1
Run/Stop Profile 1
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to power
lines at unit.
or
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
a. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
power lines at unit.
or
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
b. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
analog output cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
20. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block.
21. CONSTRUCTION:
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic.
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included).
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing 2 captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included).This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
22. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs. (0.6 kgs)
BASIC OPERATION
The TSC controls the temperature profile of a system by measuring the
temperature via an input probe, compares the actual temperature to the setpoint
profile in progress, and calculates the new output power value by use of a
modified PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new
output power value so the process temperature conforms to the programmed
profile. The PID control algorithm incorporates features which provide
minimum overshoot and excellent temperature control accuracy for a process.
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal display mode, the unit will display the process temperature in
the upper display. One of five other parameters may be selected for viewing in
the lower display:
18. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Span Drift: ≤ 100 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: ≤ 1 μ V/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
19. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
F
Target Setpoint Profile Phase Time Remaining
% Output Power Temperature Symbol (F/C)
Profile Status
The program profile status display indicates the active profile number with
the current ramp or hold phase of the profile. The profile can be started, stopped,
advanced, etc. from the front panel when the profile status display is viewed, if
not locked from access.
The phase time remaining display, shows the time remaining in a ramp or
hold phase and, if not locked from access, may be changed on-line to effect
temporary changes to the program. Additionally, the target setpoint and %
output power (manual mode only) may also be changed on-line or locked from
operator access.
From the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode from any parameter module. The controller configuration and
parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.
1-717-767-6511
585
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONFIGURATION MODE
Configuration 5,.Cooling *
The configuration modules serve to provide the basic set-ups required by
the controller. It is divided into sections which group together related
programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon completion of
each section, the program returns to the configuration selection stage, which
allows the user to return to the normal display mode, or advance to a later
configuration stage.
Configuration 1, Inputs
“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SPAN”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
Configuration 2, Outputs
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
-
Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select degree of input filtering
Enter input correction span (slope)
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function
-
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter ON/OF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning damping
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC low scaling value *
Enter linear DC high scaling value *
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
Configuration 6, Serial Communications *
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”
“P-tr”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“CPAC”
“PrAC”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
Configuration 4, Alarms *
“Act 1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
“CSEt”
“SP-x”
“PId”
“PB-x”
“It-x”
“dt-x”
Configuration 8, Profiles
“PSEt”
“PnCC”
- Select degree of setpoint access
- Select degree of power access
- Select degree of profile status
access
- Select degree of phase time remaining
access
- Enable temperature units display
- Enter parameter access code
- Select degree of PID access
- Select degree of alarm access *
- Enable manual reset of alarms *
- Enable control point access
- Enable ramp/hold program access
- Enable automatic/manual transfer
- Enable auto-tune invocation
-
Select operation mode of alarm #1
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
HARDWARE FEATURES
F
NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate
provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance for excellent temperature
control. Measurement accuracy of 0.15%
provides closer process control conforming to
the desired control setpoint value.
The unit accepts a variety of both
thermocouple or RTD temperature probes.
The A.C. input power is switch selectable,
allowing the unit to operate from either 115
VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the
output modules may be easily changed or
replaced without disturbing the wiring behind
the panel and NO re-programming is required.
The standard model simply requires pressing a
latch to remove the unit. The NEMA 4X/IP65
rated model utilizes two panel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water
tight seal, when properly installed.
Low-drift, highly stable circuit design ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is
easily accomplished via the programming menu.
586
-
Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included
in print-out
Configuration 7, Control Points
Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“P-CS”
- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap
“PnLn”
“PnEb”
“PnPC”
“Pnr1”
“PnL1”
“PnH1”
.
.
.
.
“Pnr8”
“PnL8”
“PnH8”
“Pn 1”
.
.
.
.
“Pn16”
- Select control point number for set-up 1, 2,
3, & 4
- Enter setpoint value for selected control
point
- Select if PID gain set to be loaded with
setpoint
- Enter proportional band for selected
control point *
- Enter integral time for selected control
point *
- Enter derivative time for selected control
point *
- Select profile or event output for set-up 1,
2, 3, or 4
- Enter program-repeat cycle count for
selected profile
- Select link option for selected profile
- Enter error band for temperature
conformity for selected profile
- Enter power-down resume status for
selected profile
- Enter ramp rate 1 for selected profile *
- Enter setpoint level 1 for selected profile *
- Enter hold time 1 for selected profile *
-
Enter ramp rate 8 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 8 for selected profile
Enter hold time 8 for selected profile *
Select event outputs at phase 1 for
selected profile *
*
- Select event outputs at phase 16 for
selected profile *
Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations
(Detailed in the operator’s manual)
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller’s setpoint can be protected from out of range values, by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can also be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate, independent of a
programmed profile. This feature reduces thermal shock to the process and
also helps to minimize temperature overshoot.
The active setpoint, which can be a running profile, may also be transmitted
by the linear DC output for slave control loops.
Four control points are available which can be implemented at any time.
Each control point is programmed independently, with each having a setpoint
and a PID gain set value. With gain value changes, the output power control
signal will not “bump” resulting in a smooth control transition.
INPUT FEATURES
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide
better temperature control.
A programmable temperature shift and slope function can be used to
compensate for probe errors or to have multiple TSC units indicate the same
nominal temperature.
A programmable User Input is available to control a variety of controller
functions, such as profile control, auto/manual transfer, serial communication
print requests, etc.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
too much power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioningcycle time and programmable D.C. Linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.
During execution of a profile, two independent, timed event outputs are
available to control or signal other equipment. The event outputs use the alarm
channels.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.
AUTO-TUNE
HIDDEN FUNCTIONS MODE *
The hidden mode is accessible from the normal operating mode by holding
the PAR button for 3 seconds. The five functions in this mode may be lockedout individually in configuration 3 parameter lock-outs section.
“ CP”
“Prun”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”
- Load control point x
- Control ramp/hold profile state
- Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and Manual control
- Invoke/Cancel PID auto-tune
- Reset latched alarms
OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITHOUT RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Cooling with Alarm output, without the RS485 option,
has independent outputs. Therefore, the cooling output and/or alarm output(s)
can be installed with any combination of output modules.
The model TSC has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked at start-up, while ramping, or at setpoint,
depending on the process requirements. A programmable auto-tune damping
factor produces various levels of process control and response characteristics.
PROFILE PROGRAMMING
Profiles are programmed independently of each other and are separate from
the configuration of other controller parameters. Each profile has parameters for
error band (profile conformity), linking, auto-start and program repeat cycles.
Profiles may be altered during execution, so changes take effect as the
programmed profile advances.
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
The model TSC has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front panel program disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Hidden Mode
Protected Mode
Unprotected Mode
Configuration Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.
OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITH RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Cooling with Alarm output, with RS485 option, does
not have independent outputs. In this case, the cooling output and/or alarm
output(s) must have the same type of output modules installed since they share
the common terminal.
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE
The unprotected mode is accessible when program disable is inactive or when
the proper access code number from the protected mode is entered. Only from
this mode can the configuration modes be accessed.
“SP”
“OPOF”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
-
Enter setpoint *
Enter %output power offset *
Enter output power *
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time *
Enter derivative time *
Enter value for alarm #1 *
Enter value for alarm #2 *
Select basic configuration module
Return to normal display mode
F
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming
PROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The protected mode is accessible when program disable is active, also this
mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access code
number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3 parameter
lock-outs section can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
“End”
-
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter access value to unprotected mode
Return to normal display mode
1-717-767-6511
587
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OUTPUT MODULES
Units equipped with RS485 option must have the Dual Alarm or Cooling
w/alarm options fitted with the same type of output modules. The controller’s
main output (OP1) can be fitted with any output module. Output modules are
shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
Logic/SSR Drive: can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Relay:
Type: Form -C (Form-A with RS485 option only)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy:100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC.
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz.
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.
APPLICATION
F
TSC GLASS TEMPERING APPLICATION
A manufacturer of glass items needs to
anneal (temper) their products to reduce the
brittleness of the glass structure. The tempering
process requires the glass to be heated and
subsequently cooled at a controlled rate to
change the structure of the glass. Different
tempering profiles are required for different
types of glass products.
A TSC is employed to control the
temperature profile of the annealing oven.
Four different temperature profiles are stored in
the controller. The 4 to 20 mA analog output
option is utilized to cool the annealing oven
during the cool down ramp phases. An event
output is used to quickly cool the oven at the
end of the batch run (alarm 1). Alarm 2 is used
to signal the operator whenever the
temperature is outside the prescribed program
profile.
Note: Units equipped with the RS485 option
have different terminal designators. See
“Output Variations with or without the
RS485 Option”.
The programming for this profile is as follows:
Parameter Value
588
“P1r1”
5.0
“P1L1”
“P1H1”
“P1r2”
“P1L2”
“P1H2”
300
40.0
3.0
150
0.0
“P1r3”
“P1 1”
“P1 2”
“P1 3”
“P1 4”
-0.1
1F2F
1F2F
1F2F
1N2F
Description
Ramp from ambient temp. during heat phase at
5.0°/min.
Target setpoint level 300°
Heat at 300° for 40.0 minutes
Ramp down 3.0°/min. during cooling phase
Target Setpoint is 150°
Do not hold at 150° (used as “phantom” hold time
for triggering event output for auxiliary cooling)
End Program
Turn off output 1 (output 2 is alarm)
Keep off output 1
Keep off output 1
Turn on output 1 for Auxiliary Exhaust Fan
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
TSC
PMK5
RLY
RLY6
DESCRIPTION
Temperature
Setpoint
Controller
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 VDC
ALARM OUTPUTS COOLING OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
NO
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TSC01001
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TSC11001
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
NO
TSC11002
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
YES
TSC11004
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
YES
TSC11005
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
YES
TSC12004
YES
NO
YES
1
YES
YES
TSC12005
Relay Module
OMD00000
Triac Module
OMD00001
Logic/SSR Drive Module
OMD00003
Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN to 1/8 DIN)
PMK50000
SSR Power Unit
RLY50000
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY60000
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY6A000
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY70000
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should
be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to purchase the
appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s) and cooling output.
The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules that do not have the RS485 option.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power unit. It
should never be connected to a line voltage.
All modules are shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
F
1-717-767-6511
589
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL P16 - 1/16 DIN PROCESS CONTROLLER
This is a brief overview of the P16. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
T16/P16 Temperature/Process Controller Bulletin starting on page 541.
z PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
z ACCEPTS 0-10 V AND 0/4-20 mA SIGNALS
z ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
z DC ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)
z USER PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION BUTTON
z PC OR FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
z PC CONFIGURABLE WITH TP16KIT
UL Recognized Component,
File #E156876
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec (10 Hz rate)
Step Response Time: 300 msec typical, 400 msec max to within 99% of
final value with step input.
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Analog Output: Upscale drive when assigned to retransmitted input.
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: >120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: 120 VAC @ 15 sec max
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (P16 only)
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.
INPUT
RANGE
F
590
MAX
ACCURACY * IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD
10 VDC
(-1 to 11)
0.30 % of
reading
+0.03V
1 MΩ
50 V
10 mV
20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)
0.30 % of
reading
+0.04mA
10 Ω
100 mA
10 µA
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL P48 - 1/16 DIN PROCESS CONTROLLER
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
ACCEPTS 0 to 10 VDC or 0/4 to 20 mA DC INPUTS
OPTIONAL TWO LINEAR DC OUTPUTS (0 to 10 V, 0/4 to 20 mA)
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS
OPTIONAL REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT (0/4 to 20 mA)
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
SECOND SETPOINT SETTING
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (Digital) FOR ADDED FLEXIBILITY
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODES
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS AND SETPOINT
DESCRIPTION
The P48 Controller accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 0/4 to 20 mA DC signal,
precisely displays the input process signal according to the programmable
scaling points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear DC) to maintain the process at the desired control point. The
controller’s comprehensive yet simple programming allows it to meet a wide
variety of application requirements.
In the PID control mode the controller operates with on-demand auto-tune,
which will establish the tuning constants. The PID tuning constants may be finetuned by the operator at any time and then locked out from further modification.
The controller employs a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows
the quickest response without excessive overshoot. The unit can be transferred
to operate in the manual mode, providing the operator with direct control of the
output. The controller may also operate in the ON/OFF control mode with
adjustable hysteresis. a second setpoint is available to allow quick selection of
a different setpoint setting.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. On some models, the main control output and the alarm outputs
are field replaceable.
Optional alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, and Band IN or OUT) with
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
UL Recognized Component,
File # E156876
adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up
until the process stabilizes outside the alarm region. The second alarm can be
configured as a secondary PID output (heat/cool applications).
Optional Main Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) can be used for control or
process re-transmission purposes. Programmable output update time reduces
valve or actuator activity. The output range can be scaled independent of the
input range.
Optional Second Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) provides an independent
process re-transmission, while the main Linear DC output is being used for
control. The output range can be scaled independent of the input range.
Optional Remote Setpoint input (0/4 to 20 mA) allows for cascade control
loops; and allows for remotely driven setpoint signal from computers or other
similar equipment. Straightforward end point scaling with independent filtering
and local/remote transfer option expand the controller’s flexibility.
The optional RS485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a P48 and other compatible equipment such as a printer,
PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to thirty-two), the
address number of each P48 on the line can be programmed separately from 0 to
99. Data from the P48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm output(s) may
be reset by sending the proper command code via serial communications. PC
software, SFCRM, allows for easy configuration of controller parameters. These
settings can be saved to disk for later use or used for multi-controller down
loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern surfacemount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference
makes the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
F
PANEL CUT-OUT
1-717-767-6511
591
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the P48 to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and
redundant process limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”
“...”
“-..”
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
when
measurement exceeds + input range.
measurement exceeds - input range.
measurement exceeds controller limits.
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
LED Status Annunciators:
%P
MN
DV
O1
A1
A2
- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
On: Local Setpoint (Remote Setpoint option)
Off: Remote Setpoint
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error) from
setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active (for A1 option).
- Alarm #2 is active OR
- Secondary output (02) is active.
OUTPUT **
RANGE
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
2. POWER:
AC Versions: 85 VAC min. to 250 VAC max., 50 to 60 Hz, 8 VA max.
DC Versions:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 7 W
AC Power: 24 VAC ±10%; 50 to 60 Hz, 9 VA
3. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modification and setup of
controller functions and one external user input for parameter lockout or
other functions.
4. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2 PROM retains all programmable parameters
and values.
5. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
INPUT
RANGE
10 VDC
(-1 to 11)
20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)
F
MAX
ACCURACY * ACCURACY *
IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)
OVERLOAD
0.10% of
reading
+0.02 V
0.10% of
reading
+0.03 mA
0.30% of
reading
+0.03 V
0.30% of
reading
+0.04 mA
1 M ohm
300 V
10 mV
10 ohm
100 mA
10 µA
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. The
controller’s accuracy is specified in two ways: accuracy over an 18 to
28°C range at 10 to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C
range at 0 to 85% RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the
wide sensor range reflects the coefficient of the internal circuitry.
6. MAIN SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within 99% of
final value w/step input; typically, response is limited to response time of
sensor)
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.)
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC max. for 15 sec. max.
7. USER INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1 MΩ).
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC; VIL = 0.85 V max.; VIH = 3.65 V min.;
IOFF = 1μA max.
Response Time: 120 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Reset Alarms
Local/Remote Setpoint Select
Setpoint Ramp Enable
Setpoint 1/Setpoint 2 Select
Serial block print
8. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS:
Relay outputs with Form A contacts:
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load)
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life
expectancy.)
592
9. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or Linear DC
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
10. ALARMS: 1 or 2 alarms (optional)
Modes:
Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Annunciator: LED backlight for “A1”, “A2”
11. SECONDARY OUTPUT: Software selectable (overrides alarm 2)
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time Proportioning
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Deadband /Overlap: Programmable
12. MAIN AND SECOND LINEAR DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Main: Control or re-transmission, programmable update rate from 0.1 sec to
250 sec
Second: Re-transmission only, fixed update rate of 0.1 sec
4 to 20 mA
ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)
ACCURACY *
(0 to 50°C)
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
10k ohm min.
1/3500
500 ohm max.
1/3500
500 ohm max.
1/2800
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. Output
accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an 18 to 28°C range at 10
to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C range at 0 to 85%
RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the wide sensor range
reflects the coeffecient of the internal circuitry.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 10% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
13. REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT: (optional)
Input type: 0/4 to 20 mA
Input Resistance: 10Ω
Overrange: -5% to 105%
Overload: 100 mA (continuous)
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
Resolution: 1 part in 10,000.
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.1 % of full scale +½ LSD)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(0.2% of full scale +½ LSD)
Reading Rate: 10/sec.
Setpoint Filtering: Programmable Digital
Setpoint Ramping: Programmable, 1 to 9999 units/minute.
14. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS: (optional)
Type: RS485 multipoint, balanced interface
Baud Rate: 300 to 9600
Data Format: 7O1, 7E1, 7N2, 8N1
Node Address: 0 to 99, max of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 2 to 100 msec or 100 to 200 msec
Data Encoding: ASCII
Isolation w.r.t Main Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min. (50 V working)
Not isolated w.r.t. Remote Setpoint or Analog Output common
Note: RS485 and the Analog Output commons are not internally isolated
within the controller. The terminating equipment of these outputs must not
share the same common (ie. earth ground).
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. relative humidity (non-condensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all Inputs and outputs: 250 V working (2300 V for
1 minute).
Main input with respect to Analog Outputs and Remote Setpoint Input:
50 V working (2300 V for 1 minute).
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
All other inputs and outputs with respect to relay contacts: 2000 VAC
Not isolated between Analog Output and Remote Setpoint commons.
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. No loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m.
Unit is panel mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) that provides at least 20 dB shielding effectiveness. Metal
panel is connected to earth ground.
Power Line and I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent.
OR
Install 2 ferrite cores, RLC#FCOR0000 or equivalent, to AC lines at
unit for frequencies above 5 MHz.
I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
18. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
19. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
One piece tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be
removed from the case to change the output board without removing the case
from the panel or disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65
requirements for indoor use, when properly installed. Installation Category
II, Pollution Degree 2.
20. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the process value in the upper
display. One of the following parameters can be viewed in the lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Process Deviation
- Blank Display
The user scrolls through these parameters by pressing the D button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the P button
and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then entered
by the P button, which advances the user to the next parameter. Pressing the D
button immediately returns the controller to the normal operating mode without
changing the currently selected parameter.
HARDWARE FEATURES
A fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent process control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.1% or better, provides close process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.
REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT
The remote setpoint input facilitates the use of a remote signal to drive the
controller’s setpoint. The remote signal can be scaled independent to that of the
controller’s range. The controller’s response to local/remote setpoint transfers
can be programmed. Also, the remote signal is filtered by use of an adaptive
filter. With this filter, relatively large filtering time constants can be used
without suffering from long settling times. The time constant and filter disable
band are programmable. Additionally, the remote signal can also be velocity
limited (or ramped) to slow the controller’s response to changes in setpoint. This
results in a steady control response with no overshoot.
LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUTS
The Main Linear DC output has independent scaling, programmable output
update time and filter (damping) time. These parameters permit flexibility in
process configuration. The output can be set for 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA ranges and can be configured for control or for re-transmission of input
or setpoint values.
A Second Linear DC output is dedicated for the re-transmission of the
process input signal. The output can be scaled and converted independent of the
input signal and Main Linear DC output. This output is isolated from the input.
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
A second setpoint can be selected by the user input and/or through the front
panel.
The setpoint ramp feature can be used to control the setpoint value at start-up
or any time a setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature
reduces shock to the process and helps to minimize overshoot.
F
INPUT FEATURES
BASIC OPERATION
The P48 controls a process by receiving a linear DC signal representing the
process value, then calculating a control output power value by use of a
modified PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new
output power value to keep the process at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
overshoot from process disturbances.
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating process characteristics, helping to provide better
control.
The programmable user input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.
OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Programmable output cycle time, output
hysteresis, and dampening can reduce output activity without degrading control
accuracy. The main outputs can operate in PID, ON/OFF, or manual control
modes.
CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS
In addition to the Linear DC output, there are up to three relay outputs
available. Relay outputs can switch user applied AC or DC voltages for control
or alarm purposes.
1-717-767-6511
593
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
AUTO-TUNE
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
The P48 has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion
of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process
and loaded into non-volatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
The RS485 communications option allows the connection of up to 32 devices
on a single pair of wires with a distance of up to 4,000 feet and a maximum baud
rate of 9600. Since the same pair of wires are used for both transmit and receive,
only one way communication is possible at any given time. The controller has a
programmable response time to allow the host device adequate time to release
the communication line for a transmission.
Selected parameters from the P48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. It is also possible to invoke Auto-tune through the serial port.
Serial communications used with SFCRM software allows for easy controller
parameter configuration by computer.
DUAL TIME PROPORTIONAL SYSTEMS
The P48 is available with dual time proportional outputs. The dual outputs
can be used for level or heat/cool applications. The A2 output can be configured
for Secondary (cool) control. This allows for dual PID control or ON/OFF
control with unbalanced hysteresis.
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial set-up.
The following four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any
required user-interface level:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The Unprotected Parameter Mode is accessible from the Normal Display
mode when program disable is inactive or when the proper access code number
from the Protected Parameter Mode is entered. The Configuration Parameter
Modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
F
-
Enter setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select configuration access point
Return to normal display mode
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter value to access unprotected parameters and
configuration parameters
The Hidden Function Mode is accessible from the Normal Display Mode.
The functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section).
-
-
Select input signal type
Select scaled display decimal point position
Enter rounding increment and trailing zeros for scaled display
Select level of input filtering
- Scale main input
-
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function
Configuration 2, Outputs (2-OP) *
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcOd”
“ANtP”
“ANAS”
“ANut”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
-
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select output control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Main Linear DC analog output range
Main Linear DC analog output source
Main Linear DC analog output update time
Main Linear DC analog output scaling low
Main Linear DC analog output scaling high
Configuration 3, Parameter Lock-Outs (3-LC) *
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
-
Select setpoint access level
Select power access level
Enable deviation display
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select PID access level
Select alarm access level
Enable alarm reset access
Enable local/remote selection
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation
Configuration 4, Alarms (4-AL) *
“ACt1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“ACt2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
-
Select operation mode of alarm #1, or select main output
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2, or select second output
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap
Configuration 6, Serial Communications (6-SC) *
“bAUd”
“ConF”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PoPt”
-
Select baud rate
Select character frame format
Enter address
Select abbreviated or full transmission
Select print options
Configuration 7, Remote Setpoint Input (7-N2) *
HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”
“tYPE”
“dCPt”
“rnd”
“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“InP1”
“dSP2”
“InP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
The Protected Parameters Mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access
code number. Only the parameters that are enabled in the Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section) can be accessed.
-
Configuration 1, Inputs (1-IN)
Configuration 5, Second Output (5-O2) *
PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
The Configuration Parameter Mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the Configuration Access
Point allowing the user to return to the Normal Display Mode.
Select local (SP1 or SP2) or remote setpoint
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and manual control
Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
Reset latched alarms
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“FLtr”
“bAnd”
“trnF”
-
Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint filter time constant
Enter remote setpoint filter disable band
Select Local/Remote setpoint transfer response
Configuration 8, Second Linear DC Analog Output (8-A2) *
“A2tP”
“A2LO”
“A2HI”
- Second linear DC analog range
- Second linear DC analog scaling low
- Second linear DC analog scaling high
Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations (9-FS)
“Code 48”
“Code 66”
- Calibrate Instrument
- Reset parameters to factory setting
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
594
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
APPLICATION
The P48 is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum
spacing from center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This
spacing is the same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
WATER PROCESSING APPLICATION
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
A city water company needs to maintain a steady flow of water for their
customer needs. They have an existing 0 to 10 VDC flow transmitter to
measure the water flow. They need to control the water flow, have a high and
low alarm, and keep a recorded chart of the flow for later reference. The Main
Linear DC output of the P48 can be used to control the position of water
output values per the desired flow setpoint value. The P48 relay outputs can
be programmed to give a high flow alarm and a low flow alarm. With the
Second Linear DC output model, the flow measurement to the P48 can be
converted from 0-10 V to 4-20 mA and retransmitted to a 4-20 mA chart
recorder.
ALARM
POWER
+
CHART
RECORDER
HIGH
ALARM
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
VERTICAL UNIT STACKING
LOW
ALARM
PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING
PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.
UNIT POWER
CONTROL
VALVE
FLOW
SENSOR
WATER FLOW
(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Options and Output Boards are factory configured per the part number specified. Part numbers without replacement output boards listed must be returned
to the factory for output board replacement.
DEDICATED MAIN CONTROL DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
O1 or
ALARM 1
O1 OUTPUT
A1(ALARM 1)* A1 OUTPUT
A2 (ALARM 2)
OR O2
(SECONDARY)*
REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @
RS485 @
PART NUMBERS
MAIN
SECOND
REPLACEMENT
ANALOG
ANALOG
OUTPUT
OUTPUT** @ OUTPUT** @
BOARD
18-36 VDC/24 VAC 85 to 250 VAC
YES
NA
P4800011
RBD48100
P4810010
P4810000
YES
NA
P4810111
P4810101
YES
NA
P4810115
P4810105
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
P4800001
NA
P4810117
P4810107
NA
P481011A
P481010A
RBD48111
P4811110
P4811100
RBD48111
P4811112
P4811102
F
* This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
** This output is jumper and program selectable for either a current or a voltage Linear DC output.
@ These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
Option Boards are installed at the factory for the appropriate models. These boards are only needed for field replacement.
ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.
SFCRM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Softwware for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for RS485 models)
SFCRM
ICM4
RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module
ICM40030
ICM5
Three Way Isolated RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module
ICM50000
*Crimson Software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net
1-717-767-6511
595
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PCU - PROCESS CONTROL UNIT
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
FULL PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (USES OUTPUT MODULES)
OPTIONAL SECONDARY OUTPUT (USES OUTPUT MODULE)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA OR 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR PROCESS VALUE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL MOTORIZED VALVE POSITION CONTROL AND
VALVE FAIL ALARM
OPTIONAL SECOND ANALOG INPUT FOR REMOTE SETPOINT
AND CASCADE CONTROL
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
C
UL
R
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (DIGITAL) FOR ADDED
FLEXIBILITY
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS VALUE AND SETPOINT OR SECOND ANALOG INPUT
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC AND LOCAL/REMOTE SETPOINT
CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR Drive and Triac)
ACCEPTS EITHER 0 to 10 VDC OR 0 to 20 mA DC INPUTS
DESCRIPTION
F
The PCU Controller accepts either 0 to 10 VDC or a 0 to 20 mA DC input
signal, precisely scales the process signal according to programmable scaling
points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional, linear,
or valve position) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A
comprehensive set of easy to use program instructions allows the controller to
solve various applications.
The controller can operate in the PID control mode for both the main output
and optional secondary output, with on-demand auto-tune, that establishes the
tuning constants. The PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator
at any time and then locked-out from further modification. The controller
employs a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows the quickest
response without excessive overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in
the manual mode, providing the operator with direct control of the output. The
controller may also be programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode
with adjustable hysteresis.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process value and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. Replaceable and interchangeable output modules (Relay,
Logic/SSR Drive, or Triac) can be installed for the main control output, alarm
output(s) and secondary output.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
596
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONS
Optional dual alarms can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT and Valve
Fail Detect) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the output
during power-up until the process stabilizes outside the alarm region. An
optional secondary output is available (for processes that require cooling) that
provides increased control accuracy and response.
A linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to interface
with actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The output signal
can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following: % output
power, measurement value, process measurement value deviation or setpoint
value. Valve Positioner and Second Analog Input Models have the adjustable
output demand dampening, output deadband and output update time parameters
to expand the versatility of the PCU to control devices.
The optional Motorized Valve Positioner directly controls the position of a
valve by the use of twin outputs (open and close) to control the direction of
motor rotation. The motor position defines the opening position of the valve.
Two control modes are possible: position control, that makes use of the
slidewire feedback signal supplied with the positioner and velocity control, in
which no slidewire feedback signal is used. Parameters are provided to adjust
the operation of the valve. These include:
-
Valve activity hysteresis
Valve update time
Variable control dampening
Slidewire signal fail action
Adjustable valve position limits
The Valve Positioner PCU achieves tight process control, yet minimizes
unnecessary valve activity. An alarm event output or display alarm can be
programmed under loss of slidewire feedback or under valve fail detection.
The optional Second Analog Input (0 to 20 mA DC) can be configured as a
remote setpoint signal or as a secondary process signal. Configuration of the
second analog input as a remote setpoint signal allows ratio control, master
setpoint/multiple slave operation, and the ability to cascade the PCU with
another controller (external cascade). Configuration of the second input as a
secondary process signal allows operation as a two-process cascade controller
within a single unit (internal cascade). In either control mode, parameters are
provided to scale, configure, communicate and monitor the activity of both
analog inputs. A square law linearizer function can be used to linearize signals
derived from flow transmitters.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communication interface provides twoway communication between a PCU unit and other compatible equipment such
as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In multipoint
applications the address number of each unit on the line can be programmed
from zero to ninety-nine. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for wash down and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount
technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference makes
the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the PCU to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red Lion Controls
offers various units (such as an IMP, IMD1 or IMD2) that may be used for this
purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power feeds
independent from other equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages (Model dependent):
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”
- Appears when measurement exceeds +105% input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds -5% input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds “OLOL” & “ULUL”
range.
“....”
“-...”
“SLid”
“VALV”
-
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
when
when
when
when
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
loss of slidewire signal is detected.
valve actuator error is detected.
2. POWER: Switch selectable 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line
variation effect, 48 to 62 Hz, 10 VA.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
LED Backlight Status Indicators (Model dependent):
%PW
DEV
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
OPN
CLS
SEC
MAN
REM
- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error)
from process setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Secondary output is active
(for Secondary Output Option).
- Valve positioner OPEN output is active
(for Valve Positioner Option).
- Valve positioner CLOSE output is active
(for Valve Positioner Option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows second analog input
(for Second Analog Input Option).
- Flashing: Controller is in Manual control mode.
- ON: controller is in remote setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input Option).
- OFF: controller is in local setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input Option).
- Flashing: controller is in Manual control mode
(Second Analog Input Optional).
4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input for parameter lockout or other
functions.
5. SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec typ.
Response Time: 300 msec typ. (to within 99% of final value w/step input)
Signal Overdrive Threshold:
10 V Range: 13 V typ.
20 mA Range: 26 mA typ.
Signal Overdrive Response:
Main Control Output: Programmable preset output
Display: “SENS”
Alarms: Upscale drive
DC Linear: Programmable preset output
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB typ. @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typ., DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 30 seconds.
Range And Accuracy:
6.
SIGNAL
RANGE
ACCURACY (%
OF UNSCALED
READING)
0 to 10 VDC
±(0.15% + 3 mV)
0 to 20 mA DC ±(0.15% + 6 µA)
MAXIMUM
INPUT
INPUT
IMPEDANCE
RESOLUTION
300 VDC
1 MΩ
10 mV
200 mA DC
10 Ω
10 µA
OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See Ordering Information.)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load) max.
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typ.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
7. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Signal Overdrive Action: Programmable
1-717-767-6511
F
597
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
F
8. SECONDARY OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Deadband Overlap: Programmable
9. LINEAR DC OUTPUT (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA)
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance)
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV)
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or process value
(Available for OP1 or OP2, but not both.)
10. MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER (Optional):
Two Outputs: Valve open and valve close or Linear DC (optional)
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Three Inputs: Slidewire feedback, signal fail detect (Isolated from main
input)
Slidewire Resistance: 100 Ω to 100 KΩ
Slidewire Exciting Voltage: 0.9 VDC typ.
Slidewire Fail Action: programmable
Control Mode: Position mode (with slidewire) and velocity mode (w/o
slidewire).
Control Deadband: 1% to 25.0% (position mode)
0.1 to 25.0 seconds (velocity mode)
Update Time: 1 to 250 seconds
Motor Time (open, close): 1 to 9999 seconds
Position Limits: Adjustable 0.0 to 100.0% of valve stroke
Valve Fail Time: Off to 9999 seconds
Alarm mode: Dual acting; loss of slidewire feedback signal and valve fail
detection
11. SECOND ANALOG INPUT:
Range: 0 to 20 mA (Isolated from main input)
Overload: 100 mA MIN (steady state)
Input Resistance: 10 Ω typ.
Voltage Drop (@ 20 mA): 0.2 V typ.
Accuracy: 0.15% of reading ±10 μA ±1 LSD
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
12. SERIAL COMMUNICATION:
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit
Unit Address: Programmable from 0 to 99, max. of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs
13. USER INPUT (Optional): Internally pulled up to +5 VDC.
VIN = 5.25 VDC MAX, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 3.0 VMIN,
Available on all second input (MVP & ANA) models, and on models with
RS485.
Response Time: 100 msec max.
Functions: Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
Print Request
Local/Remote Setpoint Select
14. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Valve fail
Second Analog Input monitoring
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
598
Signal Overdrive Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with secondary output or motorized valve position option.)
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (maximum): 100 ppm/°C, main input; 150 ppm/°C, second input
Zero Drift (maximum):
4 to 20 mA DC Range: 0.5 μA/°C
0 to 10 VDC Range: 0.2 mV/°C
Second Input: 2 μA/°C
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
All inputs and outputs with respect to AC line: 2300 VMIN
Analog Outputs, Second Analog Input or Slidewire Input with respect to
main input: 500 VMIN
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report #96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:.
Process and/or analog output signals may deviate during EMI
disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Process and/or analog output signals may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent and 1 ferrite
core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
18. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block
Wire Range: 12-30 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5-7 inch-lbs (56-79 N-cm)
19. CONSTRUCTION: NEMA 2 For Standard Models.
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included)
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing two captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included) This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
20. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs (0.6 kgs)
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
BASIC OPERATION
The PCU controls a process by measuring the input signal and then calculating
a control output power value by use of a modified PID control algorithm. The unit
controls the system with the new output power value to keep the process at
setpoint. The PID control algorithm incorporates features that provide for high
control accuracy and low overshoot from process disturbances.
Programmable dampening output hysteresis and output update time parameters
can dramatically reduce actuator activity without degrading control accuracy.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be set up to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
AUTO-TUNE
In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the scaled process value in the
upper display. One of four other parameters can be viewed in the lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Deviation
- Second Input Process Value
The parameters can be scrolled through by pressing the DSP button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode when making a parameter change. The controller’s configuration
and parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.
The PCU has an auto-tune feature that, on demand, automatically determines
the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion of autotune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process and
loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.
OPTIONS
RATIO CONTROL
HARDWARE FEATURES
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to
a process disturbance, thus providing excellent process control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.15% or better, provides closer process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value. The unit accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 0 to
20 mA DC input signal. The AC input power is switch selectable, allowing the
unit to operate from either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the output modules may be easily
changed or replaced without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No reprogramming is required when changing or replacing modules.
The optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes two bezel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when properly installed.
The standard model simply requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two-year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.
The PCU configured for ratio operation controls a process as a ratio of
another process or to another variable. Ratio control is commonly used for flow
applications, however, any two process variables can be controlled in a
ratio mode.
Ratio Control Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
“InPt”
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
shock to the process and helps to minimize overshoot. The setpoint may also be
transmitted by the optional linear DC output for slave control loops.
The second analog input may be configured as a remote setpoint. As such, the
controller is easily switched from local/remote setpoint operation via the front
panel or user input. Ratio and bias parameters provide on-line scaling of the
remote setpoint. Absolute limit values and maximum rate of change of the
remote setpoint further enhance controller flexibility.
- Select ratio mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Enter scaling units of second input
- Local/Remote Select options
- Program User Input for Local/Remote
Setpoint selection
Ratio Control Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”
- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias
MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER
F
INPUT FEATURES
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating characteristics, helping to provide better process
control. Programmable scaling points allow the controller to display in any
engineering unit; flow, level, pressure, etc. Scaling points are used in
conjunction with the programmable rounding increment to stabilize a jittery or
otherwise hard to read process signal for better indication.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.
The second analog input has independent scaling parameters to match the
units of other processes or transmitters, or to match the controller’s range.
OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic signal overdrive detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioning
cycle time, and programmable DC linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.
The motorized valve positioner controls the position of a valve directly, by
use of “open” and “close” control outputs. The slidewire feedback signals of
the valve may optionally be connected to the controller. Alternatively, the
controller may be configured for linear input valve control using the 4 to 20 mA
DC output.
1-717-767-6511
599
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Motorized Valve Positioner Configuration Parameters
Position mode:
Velocity mode:
“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“Act1”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VOnt”
-
Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Program alarm as valve fail output
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)
Internal Cascade Operational Parameters
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
“It-2”
“dt-2”
-
View secondary setpoint value
Enter secondary proportional band
Enter secondary integral time
Enter secondary derivative time
EXTERNAL CASCADE
INTERNAL CASCADE
Cascade control allows the process to be divided into two control loops: the
primary control loop and the secondary control loop. The secondary loop receives
its setpoint from the primary loop to control an intermediate variable (steam
pressure). The control level of the intermediate variable is the input to the primary
process. The primary loop (main input) controller maintains loop regulation by
manipulating the setpoint of the secondary controller. The setpoint of the
secondary controller, in turn, changes the intermediate variable. The secondary
loop can react faster to disturbances of the intermediate variable, thereby
minimizing the effects to the primary control loop. Control loops cascaded in such
a manner provide greater control quality than would be possible with single loop
control. A single PCU can accomplish two-process cascade control.
Internal Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“OPd2”
- Select cascade mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
Similar to internal cascade control, external cascade control differs by the
employment of two controllers, one of which is equipped with a second analog
input configured as a remote setpoint. A PCU controls the secondary loop, while
a TCU controls the primary loop.
External Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
- Select ratio mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Enter scaling units of second input
- Local/Remote select options
External Cascade Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”
- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias
- Enter scaling units of second input
- Output dampening of secondary
SETPOINT MASTER CONTROL
F
Setpoint Master Control allows automatic setpoint changes to slave
controller units (up to 50 units total) from a master PCU controller. The
linear DC output of the master is looped with the second analog input
of the slave PCU controllers. Each slave unit can have unique remote
setpoint ratio and bias values.
Setpoint Slave Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
- Select remote setpoint mode
- Select second input square root
linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Enter scaling units of second input
- Limit range of remote setpoint
- Limit rate of change of remote
setpoint
Setpoint Slave Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”
600
- Second input ratio
- Second input bias
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“IN-2”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“PId2”
“rtbS”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
The PCU has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The unprotected parameter mode is accessible when program disable is
inactive or when the proper access code number from the protected mode is
entered. The configuration parameter modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“Prop”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”
-
“Pb-2”
-
“It-2”
-
“dt-2”
-
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
-
Enter Setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter Remote Setpoint ratio value
Enter Remote Setpoint bias value
View internal cascade secondary setpoint
demand
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
Enter internal cascade, secondary derivative
time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select basic configuration mode
Return to normal display mode
Configuration 4, Alarms
“tYPE”
“root”
“dCPt”
“rnd”
“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
Configuration 2, Outputs
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
“ANdb”
“ANUt”
- Select input signal type
- Select square root linearization of main
input *
- Select scaled display decimal point position
- Enter rounding increment and trailing zeroes
for scaled display
- Select level of input filtering
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function *
-
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter signal overdrive power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC output low scaling value *
Enter linear DC output high scaling value *
Enter linear DC output control deadband *
Enter linear DC output update time *
-
Select operation mode of alarm #1
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
*
- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap
Configuration 6, Serial Communications
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”
-
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
“OPd2”
*
Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included in print-out
Configuration 7, Second Input
*
- Select remote setpoint or internal cascade
mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Entering scaling parameters of second input
- Enter local/remote select options
- Enter Secondary output control dampening
Configuration 8, Motorized Valve Positioner
Position mode:
Velocity mode:
- Scale main input
-
Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Enable deviation display *
Enable second input display *
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of secondary PID access *
Select degree of ratio/bias access *
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable alarm reset access *
Enable local/remote setpoint selection *
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation
Configuration 5, Secondary Output
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
The configuration parameter mode allows the operator to set up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the configuration selection
stage allowing the user to return to the normal display mode.
Configuration 1, Inputs
*
“Act1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
-
“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VOnt”
-
*
Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Enter valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)
HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *
The hidden function mode is accessible from the normal operating mode. The
four functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in configuration 3
parameter lock-out section.
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”
*
F
- Select Local/Remote Setpoint
- Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and manual control
- Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
- Reset latched alarms
These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
1-717-767-6511
601
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
The protected parameters mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access
code number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3
parameter lock-out section can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
“It-2”
“dt-2”
-
Enter Proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter remote setpoint ratio value
Enter remote setpoint bias value
Enter internal cascade, secondary setpoint
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
- Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
- Enter internal cascade, secondary derivative
time
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
*
- Enter value for alarm #1
- Enter value for alarm #2
- Enter access value to unprotected
parameters & configuration parameters
These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
OUTPUT MODULES
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See ordering information.)
Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive) maximum.
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 ampere @ 35°C
0.75 ampere @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA maximum.
APPLICATION
F
A chemical company would like to
maintain the level of an acid solution tank to
insure constant availability for their process.
They have chosen a PCU controller which
has a continuous level probe with a 4 to 20
mA output proportional to tank level,
connected to the input terminals. The tank is
filled by controlling the position of a
proportional control valve. The control valve
is controlled by a 3 to 15 PSI air signal.
The PCU uses the level control input as its
feedback. The 4 to 20 mA input signal is
scaled so that 4 mA equals 0% and 20 mA
equals 100%.
The 4 to 20 mA output of the PCU is taken
to an I/P converter to convert the 4 to 20 mA
output to a 3 to 15 PSI signal for the control
valve. The relay outputs of the PCU are used
for high and low level alarms.
602
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELS WITHOUT SECOND INPUT OPTIONS
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
2
1
NO
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
PCU01000
PCU01001
PCU10000
PCU10001
PCU10002
PCU11000
PCU11001
PCU11002
PCU11004
PCU11005
PCU12001
PCU12004
PCU12005
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with secondary outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type). As a result,
these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
SECOND ANALOG INPUT MODELS (RSP)
NEMA 4/XIP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
2
2
2
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
PCU10104
PCU11108
PCU12108
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with secondary outputs, with shared common
terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module.
The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER MODELS (MVP)
NEMA 4/XIP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
COOLING
OUTPUT
RS485 COM
PART NUMBER
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
1
1
1
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
PCU10307
PCU11306
PCU12306
ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Relay Module
OMD00000
Triac Module
OMD00001
Logic/SSR Drive Module
OMD00003
SSR Power Unit
RLY50000
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY60000
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY6A000
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY70000
F
Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to
purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s),
the secondary output, and valve positioner outputs.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power unit.
It should never be connected to line voltage.
All modules are packaged separately and must be installed by the user.
1-717-767-6511
603
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PSC - PROCESS SETPOINT CONTROLLER
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM DELAY FOR PROFILE CONFORMITY,
PLUS PROGRAM LINKING, REPEATING AND AUTO POWER-ON
FUNCTIONS FOR ENHANCED CAPABILITY
DUAL EVENT OUTPUTS FOR TIMED ACTIVATION OF PROCESS
EQUIPMENT SUCH AS STIRRERS, FANS, HEATERS, ETC. (Uses
Alarm Output Channels)
FOUR SETPOINT & PID PARAMETER SETS FOR QUICK
RECALL OF SETPOINTS AND/OR GAIN VALUES DURING BATCH
OR PROCESS CHANGEOVER
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT FOR CONTROLLER AND
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROL
100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
C
UL
R
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS AND SETPOINT OR PROCESS AND PROFILE STATUS
ACCEPTS EITHER 0 to 10 VDC OR 4 to 20 mA DC INPUT SIGNAL
US LISTED
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR drive, and Triac)
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROLLER FOR TIME VS. PROCESS
(RAMP/SOAK) AND SPECIAL BATCH/RECIPE APPLICATIONS
ADVANCED PROGRAM PROFILING IN A 1/8 DIN PACKAGE
ON-LINE MONITORING AND CONTROL OF PROGRAM STATUS,
TIME, AND SETPOINT VALUE (Profile Run, Pause, Stop, Advance,
Modify Time, & Setpoint Value)
DESCRIPTION
F
The PSC is a setpoint controller suitable for time vs. process control
applications. The PSC Controller accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA
DC input signal, precisely scales the process signal, according to programmable
scaling points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set
of easy to use steps allows the controller to satisfy various applications. The user
input can be programmed to perform a variety of controller functions.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the measured process value and
setpoint or the process and profile status simultaneously. Front panel indicators
inform the operator of controller status and output states. Replaceable output
modules (Relay, logic/SSR drive or Triac) can be fitted to the main control
output, alarm output(s) or timed event output(s), and secondary output.
The PSC has been designed to simplify the set-up and operation of a
controlled setpoint profile program. The setpoint program is easily entered and
controlled through the front panel. Full display capabilities keep the operator
informed of the process value, profile status, output states, and setpoint value.
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (Uses Output Modules)
OPTIONAL SECONDARY OUTPUT (Uses Output Module)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA OR 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR PROCESS RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
The controller can operate in the standard PID control mode for both Output
1 and Output 2 with on-demand auto-tune which establishes the PID gain set.
The PID gain set can be fine tuned by the operator at any time or may be locked
from further modification. The unit can be transferred to the manual control
mode providing the operator with direct control of the output.
The PSC features four programs or profile recipes, each with up to eight
ramp/soak segments, which can be easily stored and executed at any time.
Longer profiles can be achieved by linking one or more profiles together,
creating a single profile of up to 32 ramp/soak segments. Process profile
conformity is assured during either soak (hold) phases or both ramp and hold
phases by an adjustable error band parameter. The program repeat function
cycles the profile either continuously or a set number of times. Power-on options
automatically re-start, stop, or resume a running profile. The profile can be
controlled via the front panel buttons, the user input, or the optional serial
communications port.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
604
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Four control points, each having a setpoint and PID parameter set, are
available for instant front panel implementation during batch changeover, or
other process conditions. A control point may have its PID gain set values
disabled when implementing the control point.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communications interface provides the
capability of two-way communication between a PSC unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In
multipoint applications the address number of each unit on the line can be
programmed from 0 to 99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
Optional alarm output(s) may be configured to operate as a timed event
output or as a standard alarm output. As an alarm output it may be configured to
activate according to a variety of actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or
LO, or Band IN or OUT) with adjustable hysteresis. Also, a standby feature
suppresses the output(s) on power-up until the process stabilizes outside the
alarm region. Timed event output(s) allow the controller to activate other
equipment while a programmed profile is running. Each profile can define up to
16 event states (phases), for each output(s).
An optional secondary output is available for processes that require cooling
which provides increased control accuracy and response.
The optional linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to
interface with final actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The
output signal can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following:
% Output Power
Measurement Value
Measurement Value Deviation
Setpoint Value
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for washdown and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount technology,
extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference, makes the controller
extremely reliable in industrial environments.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the PSC to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls offers various units (such as an IMP, IMD1 or IMD2) that may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) Red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) Green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”
“....”
“-...”
- Appears when measurement exceeds +105% of input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds -5% of input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds “OLOL” & “ULUL”
range.
- Appears when display value exceeds + display range.
- Appears when display value exceeds - display range.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect,
48-62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
6 LED Backlight Status Indicators:
%PW
PGM
MAN
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows profile status or profile time
remaining.
- Controller is in manual mode.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Secondary output is active (for Secondary Option).
4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input.
5. SETPOINT PROFILE:
Profiles: 4
Segments Per Profile: 8 ramp/hold segments (linkable to 32 segments).
Ramp Rate: 0.1 to 999.9 units/minute or no ramp.
Hold Time: Off or from 0.1 to 999.9 minutes, can be extended to 500 hours
by linking.
Error Band Conformity: Off or from 1 to 9999 units deviation, + value for
hold phases, - value for both ramp and hold phases.
Power-On Modes: Stop, auto-start, or profile resume.
Start Mode: Ramps from process value.
Program Auto Cycle: 1 to 249, or continuous.
Event Outputs: 2, time activated with profile [uses Alarm output(s)].
Control: Front panel buttons, user input, or RS485 communications.
6. CONTROL POINTS:
Setpoints: 4
PID gain sets: 4
Control: Front panel buttons or user input.
7. SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input).
Signal Overdrive Threshold:
10 V Range: 13 V
20 mA Range: 26 mA
Signal Overdrive Response:
Main Control Output: Programmable preset output.
Display: “SENS”
DC Linear: Programmable preset output.
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 db @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 db, DC to 50/60 Hz.
8. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Signal Range
Accuracy (% of
Unscaled Reading)
Max. Input
Input
Impedance
Resolution
0 to 10 VDC
±(0.15% + 3 mV)
300 VDC
1M Ω
10 mV
0 to 20 mADC
±(0.15% + 6 µA)
200 mADC
10 Ω
10 µA
9. OUTPUT MODULES (For All Output Channels):
(Optional - Must be ordered separately)
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with RS485 option)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (Decreasing load and/or
increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Ratings: Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max Load Current: 1 AMP @ 35°C
0.75 AMP @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.
10. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT:
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC.
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Auto-tune: When performed, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable.
11. SECONDARY OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable.
DeadBand Overlap: Programmable.
12. LINEAR DC DRIVE (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA).
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance).
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV).
Min. Load Resistance: 10 K Ω (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or process value.
(Available for OP1 or OP2, but not both.)
1-717-767-6511
F
605
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
13. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module.
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Timed event output(s)
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched.
Delay: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with secondary output).
14. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional):
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface.
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600.
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity.
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit.
Unit Address: Programmable from 0-99, max. of 32 units per line.
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common.
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs.
15. USER INPUT: VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 2.0 VMIN
Response time: 100 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Transfer
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
F
Print Request
Load Control Point
Run/Hold Profile 1
Run/Stop Profile 1
16. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0° to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40° to 80°C
Span Drift: 90 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: 0 to 10 VDC Range - 0.2 mV/°C
4 to 20 mA DC Range - 0.5 μA/°C
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report #96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input and/or analog output signal may deviate during
EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Measurement input and/or analog output signal may deviate during
EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
606
18. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block.
19. CONSTRUCTION:
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic.
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included).
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing 2 captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included). This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor
use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
20. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs. (0.6 kgs)
BASIC OPERATION
The PSC controls the process profile of a system by measuring the input
signal, comparing it to the setpoint value of the profile in progress, and
calculates the new output power value by use of a modified PID control
algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power value so the
process value conforms to the profile. The PID control algorithm incorporates
features which provide high control accuracy and low disturbance overshoot.
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal display mode, the unit will display the scaled process value in
the upper display. One of five other parameters may be selected for viewing in
the lower display:
Target setpoint
% Output Power
Profile Status
Profile phase time remaining
Blank the lower display.
The profile status display indicates the active program number with the
current ramp or hold phase of the program. The profile can be started, stopped,
advanced, etc., from the front panel when the profile status display is viewed, if
not locked from access.
The phase time remaining display, shows the time remaining in a ramp or hold
phase and, if not locked from access, may be changed on-line to effect temporary
changes to the profile. Additionally, the target setpoint and % output power
(manual mode only) may also be changed on-line or locked from operator access.
From the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode from any parameter module. The controller configuration and
parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.
HARDWARE FEATURES
NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate
provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance for excellent process
control. Measurement accuracy of 0.15%
provides closer process control conforming
to the desired control setpoint value.
The unit will accept either a 0 to 10 VDC
or a 4 to 20 mADC input signal. The A.C.
input power is switch selectable, allowing
the unit to operate from either 115 VAC or
230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the
output modules may be easily changed or
replaced without disturbing the wiring
behind the panel and NO re-programming
is required. The standard model simply
requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
The NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes
two panel securing screws and a neoprene
gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when
properly installed.
Low-drift, highly stable circuit design ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONFIGURATION MODE
Configuration 4, Alarms *
The configuration modules serve to provide the basic set-ups required by
the controller. It is divided into sections which group together related
programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon completion of
each section, the program returns to the configuration selection stage, which
allows the user to return to the normal display mode, or advance to a later
configuration stage.
Configuration 1, Inputs
“tYPE”
“dCPt”
“rnd”
“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
- Select current or voltage
- Select scaled display decimal point position
- Enter rounding increment and trailing zeros for scaled
display
- Select degree of input filtering
- Enter display reading for scaling point #1
- Key-in or apply signal level for scaling point #1
- Enter display reading for scaling point #2
- Key-in or apply signal level for scaling point #2
- Enter setpoint lower limit
- Enter setpoint higher limit
- Enter setpoint ramp rate
- Select user input function
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”
-
Select operation mode of alarm #1
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms
- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap
Configuration 6, Serial Communications *
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”
-
Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic transmissions
Enter automatic print rate
Select parameters to be included in print-out
Configuration 7, Control Points
“CSEt”
“SP-x”
“PID”
“PB-x”
“It-x”
“dt-x”
Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter signal overdrive power preset
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning damping
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC low scaling value *
Enter linear DC high scaling value *
-
Select control point number for set-up 1, 2, 3, & 4
Enter setpoint value for selected control point
Select if PID gain set to be loaded with setpoint
Enter proportional band for selected control point *
Enter integral time for selected control point *
Enter derivative time for selected control point *
Configuration 8, Profiles
“PSEt”
“PnCC”
“PnLN”
“PnSt”
“PnEb”
“Pnr1”
“PnL1”
“PnH1”
.
.
“Pnr8”
“PnL8”
“PnH8”
“Pn 1”
.
.
“Pn16”
Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“P-CS”
“P-tr”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“CPAC”
“PrAC”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
-
Configuration 5, Secondary Output *
Configuration 2, Outputs
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
“Act 1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”
Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Select degree of profile status access
Select degree of phase time remaining access
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable manual reset of alarms *
Enable control point access
Enable ramp/hold program access
Enable automatic/manual transfer
Enable auto-tune invocation
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
-
Select profile or event output for set-up 1, 2, 3, or 4
Enter program-repeat cycle count for selected profile
Select link option for selected profile
Enter power-down resume status for selected profile
Enter error band for process conformity for selected profile
Enter ramp rate 1 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 1 for selected profile *
Enter hold time 1 for selected profile *
Enter ramp rate 8 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 8 for selected profile *
Enter hold time 8 for selected profile *
Select event outputs at phase 1 for selected profile
*
Select event outputs at phase 16 for selected profile
*
Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations
(Detailed in the operator’s manual)
programming.
SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller’s setpoint can be protected from out of range values, by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can also be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate, independent of a
programmed profile. This feature reduces shock to the process and also helps to
minimize overshoot.
The active setpoint, which can be a running profile, may also be transmitted
by the linear DC output for slave control loops.
Four control points are available which can be implemented at any time. Each
control point is programmed independently, with each having a setpoint and a
PID gain set value. With gain value changes, the output power control signal
will not “bump” resulting in a smooth control transition.
INPUT FEATURES
OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
too much power can cause damage. Automatic signal overdrive detection can be
used to define the state of the output channels, when this situation occurs. With
adjustable time proportioning-cycle time and programmable D.C. Linear output,
the controller can satisfy a wide variety of output requirements.
During execution of a profile, two independent timed event outputs are
available to control or signal other equipment. The event outputs use the
alarm channels.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.
F
AUTO-TUNE
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating characteristics, helping to provide better
process control.
Scaling points allow the controller to display in any engineering unit; flow,
level, pressure temperature, etc. Scaling points are used in conjunction with the
programmable rounding increment to stabilize a jittery or otherwise hard to read
process signal for better indication.
A programmable User Input is available to control a variety of controller
functions, such as profile control, auto/manual transfer, serial communication
print requests, etc.
The model PSC has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion
of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process
and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked at start-up, while ramping, or at setpoint,
depending on the process requirements. A programmable auto-tune damping
factor produces various levels of process control and response characteristics.
PROFILE PROGRAMMING
Profiles are programmed independently of each other and are separate from the
configuration of other controller parameters. Each profile has parameters for error
band (profile conformity), linking, auto-start and program repeat cycles. Profiles
may be altered during execution, so changes take effect as the profile advances.
1-717-767-6511
607
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
The model PSC has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front panel program disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Hidden Mode
Protected Mode
Unprotected Mode
Configuration Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.
OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITH RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Secondary with Alarm output, with RS485 option,
does not have independent outputs. In this case, the secondary output and/or
alarm output(s) must have the same type of output modules installed since they
share the common terminal.
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE
The unprotected mode is accessible when program disable is inactive or when
the proper access code number from the protected mode is entered. Only from
this mode can the configuration modes be accessed.
“SP”
“OPOF”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”
-
Enter setpoint *
Enter %output power offset *
Enter output power *
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time *
Enter derivative time *
Enter value for alarm #1 *
Enter value for alarm #2 *
Select basic configuration module
Return to normal display mode
OUTPUT MODULES
Units equipped with RS485 option must have the Dual Alarm or Secondary
w/alarm options fitted with the same type of output modules. The controller’s
main output (OP1) can be fitted with any output module. Output modules are
shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
PROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The protected mode is accessible when program disable is active, also this
mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access code
number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3 parameter
lock-outs section can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
-
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
proportional band
integral time
derivative time
value for alarm #1
value for alarm #2
access value to unprotected mode
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
HIDDEN FUNCTIONS MODE *
The hidden mode is accessible from the normal operating mode by holding
the PAR button for 3 seconds. The five functions in this mode may be lockedout individually in configuration 3 parameter lock-outs section.
“ CP”
“Prun”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”
-
Relay:
Type: Form -C (Form-A with RS485 option only)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Invoke control point x
Control ramp/hold profile state
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and Manual control
Invoke/Cancel PID auto-tune
Reset latched alarms
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.
F
OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITHOUT RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Secondary with Alarm output, without the RS485
option, has independent outputs. Therefore, the secondary output and/or alarm
output(s) can be installed with any combination of output modules.
Logic/SSR Drive: can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC.
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max @ 60 Hz.
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz.
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.
608
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
APPLICATION
A chemical treatment process requires the PH level of a solution
be ramped at staged levels over specific time periods during
start-up. The PSC unit is installed to meet this requirement.
After the tank is filled, the PSC’s user input is triggered to run
profile 1 to start the process. Alarm output 2 signals the operator
if the PH level deviates outside the running profile. The error band
(profile conformance) is programmed to the desired value to
prevent the PH level from deviating from the programmed
setpoint profile. Timed event output 1 signals that the profile
process is complete.
F
1-717-767-6511
609
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
DESCRIPTION
PSC
Process
Setpoint
Controller
PMK5
RLY
RLY
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ALARM
OUTPUTS
SECONDARY
OUTPUT
YES
YES
NO
2
YES
YES
NO
2
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
RS485 COM
PART
NUMBER
NO
NO
PSC11001
NO
YES
PSC11004
1
YES
YES
PSC11005
YES
2
NO
YES
PSC12004
YES
1
YES
YES
PSC12005
Relay Module
OMD00000
Triac Module
OMD00001
Logic/SSR Drive Module
OMD00003
Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN to 1/8 DIN)
PMK50000
SSR Power Unit
RLY50000
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY60000
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY6A000
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay
RLY70000
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with secondary outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type). As a result,
these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.
Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to
purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s)
and secondary output. The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules that do not
have the RS485 option.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power
unit. It should never be connected to a line voltage.
All modules are shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
F
610
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL TLA - TEMPERATURE LIMIT ALARM
z FM APPROVED, UL RECOGNIZED
z 2-LINE BY 4-DIGIT DISPLAY
z EXCEED, OUTPUT, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATORS
z FOUR BUTTON SILICONE RUBBER KEYPAD
z THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD SENSOR INPUT
z REMOTE RESET INPUT
z MAIN LIMIT OUTPUT: 5A RELAY. SELECTABLE FOR HIGH OR
LOW TRIP ACTIVATION
z OPTIONAL ALARMS: 5A RELAY(S)
z OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
FM
UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259
APPROVED
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SUMMARY
The TLA is a Factory Mutual approved temperature limit alarm, intended to
provide an independent shutdown for thermal processes. The TLA accepts
signals from a variety of temperature sensors (thermocouple or RTD elements),
and its comprehensive programming allows it to meet a wide variety of
application requirements.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and limit
setpoint simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the
process and output status. The main limit output and alarm outputs are field
replaceable.
The limit output is selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process
temperature goes above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit
setpoint for a low trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process
shutdown. The limit output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns
to the proper operating range; manual reset is required (local or remote). Sensor
failure will initiate a process shutdown.
Relay alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of actions
(Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, and Band IN or OUT) with adjustable
hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up until the
process stabilizes outside the alarm region.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern
surface-mount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise
interference makes the TLA extremely reliable in industrial environments.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the TLA to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
F
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT
1-717-767-6511
611
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2 line by 4-digit LED
Upper (Main) Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower (Secondary) Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL” - Appears when measurement exceeds + sensor range.
“ULUL” - Appears when measurement exceeds - sensor range.
“OPEN” - Appears when open sensor is detected.
“SHrt” - Appears when shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
“...” - Appears when display values exceed + display range.
“-..” - Appears when display values exceed - display range.
LED Status Annunciators:
EX - Temperature exceeds limit setpoint
OUT - Limit output is de-energized
A1 - Alarm #1 is active
A2 - Alarm #2 is active
2. POWER:
Line Voltage Models: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8 VA.
Low Voltage Models:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC, 7 W.
AC Power: 24 VAC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz, 9 VA
3. CONTROLS: Four rubber push buttons: R, P, Up, Down
4. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
values.
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: FM rated @ 0 to 65°C, UL rated @ 0 to 55°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 65°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
6. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all inputs and outputs: 2300 V for 1 minute (250
V working)
Relay contacts to all other inputs and outputs: 2300 VAC
DC Power with respect to sensor input: 50 V working (500 V for 1 minute)
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
Factory Mutual Approved, Report #3014646, FM 3545, FM 3810
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL 50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
F
1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Step Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within
99% of final value)
Normal Mode Rejection: Greater than 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 15 seconds max.
2. Failed Sensor Response:
Main Output: Sensor failure will initiate a process shutdown
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale
3. INDICATION ACCURACY: ±(0.3% of Span +1°C) at 23°C ambient after
20 minute warm-up. (Includes NIST conformity, cold junction effect, A/D
conversion errors and linearization conformity.
Span Drift (maximum): 130 PPM/°C
4. RTD INPUT: 2 or 3 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.0039162
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max. per input lead
612
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
Surge
RF conducted interference
Voltage dip/interruptions
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L, 2 kV
L&N-E power
1 kV signal
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
8. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Gage Capacity: Two 14 AWG (2.55 mm), four 18 AWG (1.02 mm), or
four 20 AWG (0.61 mm).
Terminal Torque: 1.0Nm (8.9 in-lbs.).
1.4Nm (12.4 in-lbs.) max.
9. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
One piece tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be
removed from the case to change the output board without removing the case
from the panel or disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65
requirements for indoor use, when properly installed. Flame resistant.
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
10. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)
5. THERMOCOUPLE INPUT:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV, software selectable
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ all types
Lead resistance effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C typ., (±1.5°C max), error over
0 to 65°C max. ambient temperature range. Defeated for Linear mV
indication mode.
Resolution: 1° for all types, or 0.1° for T, E, J, K, and N onlY.
TC TYPE
T
E
J
K
R
S
RTD TYPE
RANGE
B
385
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
N
392
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
OHMS
2.0 to 320.0
mV
RANGE
-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to +750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to 3214°F
+149 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to +56.00
WIRE COLOR
ANSI
BS 1843
blue (+)
red (-)
violet (+)
red (-)
white (+)
red (-)
yellow (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
grey (+)
red (-)
orange (+)
red (-)
no standard
white (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
yellow (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
no standard
orange (+)
blue (-)
no standard
6. REMOTE RESET INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1MΩ).
VIL: 0.85 V max., VIH: 3.65 V min., VIN MAX: 5.25 VDC, IOFF: 1μA max.
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. LIMIT AND ALARM OUTPUT RELAYS:
Contact Rating: 5 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load) 1/10 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
increases life expectancy.)
2. LIMIT OUTPUT: TLA21000: Form-C relay; TLA11100: Form-A relay.
Selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process temperature goes
above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit setpoint for a low
trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process shutdown. The limit
output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns to the proper
operating range; manual reset is required (local or remote).
Annunciators:
“EX” - Lit when the process temperature exceeds the limit setpoint.
“OUT” - Lit when the limit output is de-energized.
3. ALARM OUTPUTS (Optional): One or two Form-A relays.
Modes:
Absolute High Acting
Absolute Low Acting
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched. Latched alarms can be
reset regardless of limit exceed condition.
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Annunciator: “A1” and “A2” programmable for normal or reverse acting.
ORDERING INFORMATION
85 to 250 VAC
LIMIT OUTPUT
ALARM 1 OUTPUT
Form-C Relay
Form-A Relay
Form-A Relay
Form-A Relay
ALARM 2 OUTPUT
REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT BOARD
PART NUMBERS
RBDLA210
TLA21000
Form-A Relay
RBD48111
TLA11100
ALARM 2 OUTPUT
REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT BOARD
PART NUMBERS
RBDLA210
TLA21010
RBD48111
TLA11110
18 to 36 VDC / 24 VAC
LIMIT OUTPUT
ALARM 1 OUTPUT
Form-C Relay
Form-A Relay
Form-A Relay
Form-A Relay
Form-A Relay
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to Electro
Magnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for various
installations. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation
in an industrial environment.
1. The unit should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly connected
to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In very electrically noisy environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure.
The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubbers:
RLC #SNUB0000
1-717-767-6511
F
613
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.0 INSTALLING THE TLA
The TLA meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use to provide a
watertight seal in steel panels with a minimum thickness of 0.09 inch, or
aluminum panels with a minimum thickness of 0.12 inch. The units are intended
to be mounted into an enclosed panel. It is designed so that the units can be
stacked horizontally or vertically. The bezel assembly MUST be in place during
installation of the unit.
Instructions:
1. Prepare the panel cutout to the dimensions.
2. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Discard the cardboard sleeve.
3. Carefully remove the center section of the panel gasket and discard. Slide
the panel gasket over the unit from the rear, seating it against the lip at the
front of the case.
4. Insert the unit into the panel cutout. While holding the unit in place, push the
panel latch over the rear of the unit, engaging the tabs of the panel latch in
the farthest forward slot possible.
5. To achieve a proper seal, tighten the panel
latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in
the panel, torquing the screws to
approximately 7 in-lbs (79 N-cm). Over
tightening can result in distortion of the panel,
and reduce the effectiveness of the seal.
Note: The installation location of the TLA is
important. Be sure to keep it away from heat
sources (ovens, furnaces, etc.), and away from
direct contact with caustic vapors, oils, steam,
or any other process byproducts in which
exposure may affect proper operation.
Multiple Unit Stacking
The TLA is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be stacked
either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel latch with
the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel latch
screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing from
center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is the same
for vertical or horizontal stacking.
F
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
Caution: Disconnect power to the unit and to the output control circuits
to eliminate the potential shock hazard when removing the bezel
assembly.
Unit Removal Procedure
To remove a unit from the panel, first loosen the panel latch screws. Insert
flat blade screwdrivers between the latch and the case on either side of the unit,
so that the latches disengage from the grooves in the case. Push the unit through
the panel from the rear.
Caution: The bezel assembly contains electronic circuits that can be damaged
by static electricity. Before removing the assembly, discharge static charge on
your body by touching an earth ground point. It is also important that the
bezel assembly be handled only by the bezel itself. Additionally, if it is
necessary to handle a circuit board, be certain that hands are free from dirt,
oil, etc., to avoid circuit contamination that may lead to malfunction. If it
becomes necessary to ship the unit for repairs, place the unit in its case
before shipping.
Installing Bezel Assembly
To install the bezel assembly, insert the assembly into the case until the bezel
is fully seated against the lip of the case. Properly installing the bezel assembly
is necessary for watertight sealing.
Removing Bezel Assembly
The bezel assembly must be removed from the case to replace the output
board. To remove the bezel assembly, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the pry
slot on either side of the unit. Twist the screwdriver handle until the unit is
ejected enough to allow removal.
614
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2.0 WIRING THE TLA
After the unit has been mechanically mounted, it is ready to be wired. All
wiring connections are made to the rear screw terminals. When wiring the unit,
use the numbers on the label and those embossed on the back of the case, to
identify the position number with the proper function.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local
codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit (AC
or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned
with solder). Insert the wire under the clamping washer and tighten the screw
until the wire is clamped tightly.
Caution: Unused terminals are NOT to be used as tie points. Damage to the
TLA may result if these terminals are used.
POWER WIRING
AC Power
Primary AC power is connected to terminals #11 and #12, labeled AC. To
reduce the chance of noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the TLA,
an AC feed separate from that of the load should be used to power the TLA. Be
certain that the AC power to the TLA is relatively “clean” and within the
variation limit. Connecting power from heavily loaded circuits or circuits that
also power loads that cycle on and off (contacts, relays, motors, etc.), should be
avoided.
RTD
When connecting the RTD, be certain that the connections are clean and
tight. RTD sensors have a higher degree of accuracy and stability than
thermocouple sensors. Most RTD sensors available are the three wire type. The
third wire is a sense lead for canceling the effects of lead resistance of the probe.
Four wire RTD elements may be used by leaving one of the sense leads
disconnected. Two wire RTD sensors may be used in either of two ways:
A) Attach the RTD to terminals #8 and #10. Install a copper sense wire of the
same wire gauge as the RTD leads. Attach one end of the wire at the probe
and the other end to terminal #9. Complete lead wire compensation is
obtained. This is the preferred method.
B) Attach the RTD to terminals #8 and #10. Install a shorting wire between
terminals #9 and #10. A temperature offset error of 2.5°C/ohm of lead
resistance exists. The error may be compensated by programming a
temperature offset.
Note: With extended cable runs, be sure the lead resistance is less than 15
ohms/lead.
DC Power
DC Power (18 to 36 VDC) is connected to terminals #11 and #12 labeled
DC+ and DC- respectively.
CAUTION: Observe proper polarity when connecting DC voltages.
Damage to the unit may occur if polarity is reversed.
RTD Connection
RELAY CONNECTIONS
SIGNAL WIRING
Thermocouple
When connecting the thermocouple, be certain that the connections are clean
and tight. If the thermocouple probe cannot be connected directly to the TLA,
thermocouple wire or thermocouple extension-grade wire must be used to
extend the connection points (copper wire does not work). Always refer to the
thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations for mounting, temperature
range, shielding, etc. For multi-probe temperature averaging applications, two
or more thermocouple probes may be connected to the TLA (always use the
same type). Paralleling a single thermocouple to more than one TLA is not
recommended. Generally, the red wire from the thermocouple is negative and
connected to the TLA’s common.
To prolong contact life and suppress electrical noise interference due to the
switching of inductive loads, it is good installation practice to install a snubber
across the contactor. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Note: Snubber leakage current can cause some electromechanical devices to be
held ON.
F
*Terminal numbers are model dependent. See Terminal Configurations for
description.
REMOTE RESET WIRING
Thermocouple Connection
The use of shielded cable is recommended. Follow the EMC installation
guidelines for shield connection.
Terminal #6 is the Remote Reset. Any form of mechanical switch may be
connected to terminal #6 (REMOTE RESET) and terminal #8 (COMM.).
Sinking open collector logic with less than 0.7 V saturation and off-state leakage
current of less than 1 μA may also be used.
1-717-767-6511
615
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION
The front panel bezel material is flame and scratch resistant, tinted plastic that
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements, when properly installed. Continuous
exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of the bezel. The
bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product. Do NOT
use solvents. There are two 4-digit LED displays, a red upper Main Display and
a lower green Secondary Display.
There are up to four panel annunciators, with red backlighting, that illuminate
to inform the operator of the TLA and output status. See the front panel diagram
for a description of the annunciators. Four front panel buttons are used to access
different modes and parameters. The following is a description of each button.
Do NOT use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc) to operate the
keypad of this unit.
Button Functions
R - The Reset (R) button is used to reset the limit and alarm relays. The limit output
cannot be reset until the process temperature returns to the proper operating
range. Latched alarms can be reset regardless of limit exceed condition.
P - The Parameter (P) button is used to access programming, enter the change,
and scroll through the available parameters in any mode.
UP, DN - The Up/Down buttons are used to modify parameters.
TLA POWER-UP
Upon applying power, the TLA delays input indication and control action for
five seconds to perform several self-diagnostic tests and to display basic TLA
information. Initially, the TLA illuminates both displays and all annunciators to
verify that all display elements are functioning. The TLA then displays the
programmed input sensor type in the main (top) display and the revision number
of the TLA’s operating system in the secondary (bottom) display. The TLA
checks for correct internal operation and displays an error message (E-xx) if an
internal fault is detected. (See the Troubleshooting section for further
information.)
Upon completion of this sequence, the TLA begins displaying the input value
and setpoint, and updates the outputs based upon this condition.
TLA CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW
The TLA is programmed with certain parameter settings from the factory.
Factory settings are listed in parentheses in the various Configuration of
Parameters tables. In many cases, these settings must be changed to the
particulars of the application before proper operation can be started.
The TLA is typically in the Normal Display Mode. In this mode, the process
temperature is displayed in the main (top) display, and the limit setpoint is
displayed in the secondary (bottom) display. When changes to the parameter
configurations are needed, the P button is pressed, and the TLA will enter into
the Parameter Mode.
PARAMETER CONFIGURATION BASIC STARTUP
For basic start-up, it is important to verify or change Input Parameter Module
(1-IN) parameters tYPE and SCAL, and Output Parameter Module (2-OP)
parameter LiAC (Limit Trip Action). For alarm set-up, it is important to verify
or change Alarms Parameter Module (4-AL) parameters ACt1, AL-1, ACt2, and
AL-2.
If the above Input parameters or the input wiring connections are not correct,
then the main (top) display may display an error message or incorrect value.
Verify the input programming and wiring. (If incorrect display continues, refer
to the Troubleshooting section.) All other parameter configurations are
important but will not prevent the TLA from showing a correct display.
4.0 PARAMETER MODE
F
The Parameter Mode is accessed by pressing the P Button from the Normal
Display Mode. While in the Parameter Mode, the temperature is displayed in the
main (top) display, and the parameter is displayed in the secondary (bottom)
display. The correct password must be entered before any parameters can be
accessed. To modify values, use the UP or DOWN button while the parameter is
displayed. Use the P button to accept the new value, and to scroll through the
parameters. The TLA will automatically return to the normal display mode if no
action is taken. The TLA responds to the new values immediately, but the change
is not committed to non-volatile memory until the TLA is returned to the Normal
Display Mode. If power loss occurs before returning to the normal display mode,
the new values must be re-entered.
To gain access to the Configuration Parameter Modules continue to CNFP
and press the UP button. These modules allow access to the fundamental set-up
parameters of the TLA. If the setpoint or alarm values are modified, the CNFP
step will be skipped.
Parameter Mode Reference Table
DISPLAY
PASS
SP
PARAMETER
Password to access parameters
RANGE
0 to 250
Limit setpoint
-999 to 9999
AL-1 *
Alarm #1
-999 to 9999
AL-2 *
Alarm #2
-999 to 9999
CNFP
Configuration parameter modules
End
End of Parameter Mode
“Up” button: enter
configuration modules.
DESCRIPTION
If an incorrect value is entered, the TLA will display “End”
momentarily, and then return to the normal display mode. The
default password is 10. The wildcard password is 222 (in case the
password is forgotten).
Range limited by SPLO & SPHI.
The Alarm parameters can be independently locked out from
appearing. See Configuration Module 3, Parameter Lock-outs.
These modules allow access to the fundamental set-up parameters
of the TLA. The modules are grouped into related
programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each module, the program returns to “CNFP”.
When the parameter list has been scrolled through, the TLA
will display “End” momentarily, and then return to the normal
display mode.
* Model Number Dependent.
616
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODULES
The Configuration Parameter modules are accessed by pressing the UP button
from CNFP in the Parameter Mode. The UP or DOWN buttons can be pressed to
move to the desired Parameter Module. The P button is then pressed to enter into
that module. The main (top) display will be the parameter, and the secondary
(bottom) display will be the parameter value. The UP or DOWN buttons are used
to modify the desired parameter value, and the P button enters the new value, and
moves to the next parameter. The TLA responds to the new values after the P
button is pressed, however, the change is not committed to permanent memory
until the TLA is returned to the Normal Display Mode. If power loss occurs before
returning to the Normal Display Mode, the new values must be entered again. At
the end of each module, the TLA will go back to CNFP. Other Parameter Modules
can be accessed by pressing the UP or DOWN buttons, or pressing P will return
to the Normal Display Mode.
Parameters that are model number, or program dependent will only be
displayed when the appropriate options are installed or programmed.
CONFIGURE MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (1-IN)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
tYPE
Input Type
SCAL
RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
tc-t - Type T TC
tc-E - Type E TC
tc-J - Type J TC
tc-K - Type K TC
tc-r - Type R TC
tc-S - Type S TC
tc-b - Type B TC
tc-N - Type N TC
LIN - Linear mV
r385 - 385 curve RTD
r392 - 392 curve RTD
rLIN - Linear ohms
(tc-J)
Select from the list of various thermocouple and RTD sensors.
Temperature Scale
°F or °C
(°F)
Select either degrees Fahrenheit (F) or degrees Celsius (C). If
changed, be sure to check all parameters.
dCPt
Temperature Resolution
0 or 0.0
(0)
Select either 1 or 0.1 degree resolution. If changed, be sure to
check all parameters.
FLtr
Digital Input Filtering and
Display Update
0 to 4
0 - least input filtering
3 - most input filtering
4 - most input filtering and slower 500
msec display update rate (outputs still
update at 100 msec rate)
(1)
Select the relative degree of input signal filtering and display update
rate. The filter is an adaptive digital filter that discriminates between
measurement noise and actual process changes. Therefore, the
influence on step response time is minimal. If the signal is varying
too greatly due to measurement noise, increase the filter value.
Conversely, if the fastest TLA response is desired, decrease the
filter value.
SHFt
Input Signal Shift
(correction offset)
-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(0)
If the TLA temperature disagrees with a reference temperature
instrument or if the temperature sensor has a known calibration, the
TLA temperature can be compensated by a correction offset. The
following equation expresses the relationship: Desired Display Temp
= (TLA Temp) + SHFt. Normally set to 0.
SPLO
Limit Setpoint Lower Limit
SPHI
Limit Setpoint Upper Limit
-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(0)
-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(9999)
The TLA has programmable high and low setpoint limit values to
restrict the setting range of the limit setpoint. Set the limit values so
that the temperature setpoint value cannot be set outside the safe
operating area of the process. SPHI must be above SPLO.
CONFIGURE MODULE 2 - OUTPUT PARAMETERS (2-OP)
DISPLAY
LiAc
PARAMETER
Limit Output Trip Action
RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)
LO - Low Acting
HI - High Acting
(HI)
F
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
The limit output is selectable for high or low trip activation. If the
process temperature goes above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or
below the limit setpoint for a low trip, the limit relay will de-energize
to initiate a process shutdown. See the Limit Output Action section
for details.
1-717-767-6511
617
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONFIGURE MODULE 3 - LOCKOUT PARAMETERS (3-LC)
DISPLAY
PASS
PARAMETER
Password
AL *
Alarms #1 and #2 access
level
FPrS
Front panel reset
RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
The password is required to access all parameters. The password can be
set to any value between 0 and 250. A wildcard password, 222, can be
used as an alternative to the programmed password.
0 to 250
(10)
LOC - lockout, prevents the alarms from
appearing
rEd - read only, alarms appear, but cannot
be modified
Ent - enter, alarms appear, and can be
modified
(Ent)
NO - disabled
YES - active
(YES)
The alarm(s) parameter in the Parameter Mode can be configured to be
completely locked out, read only, or fully accessible.
The front panel R button can be enabled or disabled. The Remote Reset
input is not affected by this setting.
* Model Number Dependent.
CONFIGURE MODULE 4 - ALARMS PARAMETERS (4-AL)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
Act1
Alarm 1 action mode
A-HI - absolute high
A-LO - absolute low
d-HI - deviation high
d-LO - deviation low
b-IN - band inside
b-Ot - band outside
(A-HI)
When deviation low-acting with positive alarm value (d-LO), deviation highacting with negative value (d-HI), or band inside-acting (b-IN) is selected for the
alarm action, the indicator is OFF when the alarm output is ON. See the Alarms
section for complete details of each action. If changed, check alarm values.
rSt1
Alarm 1 reset mode
Auto - automatic
LATC - manual reset
(Auto)
Automatic reset alarms are reset by the TLA when the alarm condition clears.
Latched alarms require operator action to reset the alarm condition. The front
panel R button, if enabled, can be used to reset a latched alarm (see FPrS in
Configure Module 3). A latched alarm condition may also be reset via the
Remote Reset input. See the Reset Action diagram in the Alarms section.
Stb1
Alarm 1 standby function
(delay)
NO or YES
(NO)
The alarm(s) may be independently configured to exhibit a power-on, standby
delay which suppresses the alarm output from turning ON until the temperature
first stabilizes outside the alarm region. After this condition is satisfied, the alarm
standby delay is canceled and the alarm triggers normally, until the next TLA
power-on. This feature also works for deviation and band alarms when the
setpoint is changed via keypad. This action suppresses “nuisance” alarms. See
the Alarm Standby diagram in the Alarms section.
AL-1
Alarm 1 value
Act2 *
Alarm 2 action mode
A-HI - absolute high
A-LO - absolute low
d-HI - deviation high
d-LO - deviation low
b-IN - band inside
b-Ot - band outside
(A-HI)
rSt2 *
Alarm 2 reset mode
Auto - automatic
LATC - manual reset
(Auto)
Stb2 *
Alarm 2 standby function
(delay)
AL-2 *
Alarm 2 value
AHYS
Alarm hysteresis value
F
-999 to 9999
(0)
The alarm values are either absolute values, or relative to the limit setpoint value
(deviation and band alarms). An absolute alarm value is the value that is entered
for the alarm. A relative alarm value is the mathematical sum of the temperature
limit setpoint value and the alarm value (positive or negative), thus a relative
alarm tracks the limit setpoint value as it is changed. If the alarm action is set as a
Band Alarm, then only a positive alarm value can be entered.
The Alarm 2 parameters are programmed independently of alarm 1. See the
corresponding Alarm 1 parameter for description.
NO or YES
(NO)
-999 to 9999
(0)
1 to 250
(1)
The alarm value(s) have a programmable hysteresis band to prevent alarm
output chatter near the alarm trigger point. The hysteresis value should be set
to eliminate this effect. A value of 2 to 5 is usually sufficient for most
applications. A single alarm hysteresis value applies to both alarms. See the
Alarm Action Figures, in the Alarms section, for the effect of hysteresis on the
various alarm types.
* Model Number Dependent.
618
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CONFIGURE MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (9-FS)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
CodE
Factory service function
code
RANGE
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
48 - Calibrate instrument
TLA calibration. Refer to the Calibration section for details.
66 - Reset parameters to factory
settings
Entering code 66 restores all parameters to factory settings. The
unit indicates the operation after the P button is pressed, by
displaying “rSEt” in the lower display momentarily.
77 (twice in succession) Reset TLA calibration to nominal
values
Caution: this operation erases the TLA calibration values and
defaults the values to nominal settings. Reading errors of ±10%
may result. Do not perform this operation unless the TLA has lost
calibration. Loss of calibration is signaled by an “E-CL” error
flag at power-up. To clear this flag, perform calibration procedure
as noted in the Calibration section. Alternatively, “stepping” through
one of the calibration procedures clears the error flag, but does NOT
validate the calibration accuracy in any manner.
USER PARAMETER VALUE CHART
TLA Number _____________
MNEMONIC
PARAMETER
pass
sp
aL-1
AL-2
Password
1-IN
Input Parameters
Limit Setpoint
Alarm 1 Value
Alarm 2 Value
MNEMONIC
PARAMETER
tYPE
SCAL
dCPt
FLtr
SHFt
SPLO
SPHI
Input Sensor Type
2-OP
USER SETTING
3-LC
PARAMETER
PASS
AL
FPrS
Password
4-AL
USER SETTING
Temperature Scale Units
Temperature Resolution
Digital Filtering
Input Offset
Limit Setpoint Lower Limit
Limit Setpoint Upper Limit
Lockout Parameters
MNEMONIC
USER SETTING
Alarm(s) Access Level
Front Panel Reset
Configure Alarm Parameters
MNEMONIC
PARAMETER
Act1
rst1
stb1
aL-1
Act2
rst2
stb2
aL-2
aHYS
Alarm 1 Action Mode
USER SETTING
Alarm 1 Reset Mode
Alarm 1 Standby Enabled
Alarm 1 Value
Alarm 2 Action Mode
Alarm 2 Reset Mode
Alarm 2 Standby Enabled
Alarm 2 Value
Alarm Hysteresis Value
F
Output Parameters
MNEMONIC
PARAMETER
LiAc
Limit Output Trip Action
USER SETTING
1-717-767-6511
619
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LIMIT OUTPUT ACTION
High Trip Action
The limit output is selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process
temperature goes above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit
setpoint for a low trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process
shutdown. The limit output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns
to the proper operating range; manual reset is required. The following action
figures describe the status of the limit output and the front panel indicators for
various over/under setpoint, and reset conditions. Reset is either by the front
panel R button, if enabled, or by the Remote Reset input, terminal #6. Refer to
Configure Module 2 - Output Parameters for details of configuring the limit
output. Refer to Configure Module 3 - Lockout Parameters for details of
configuring the front panel Reset button.
Low Trip Action
5.0 ALARMS (OPTIONAL)
The alarm action figures describe the status of the alarm output and the front
panel indicator for various over/under temperature conditions. The alarm output
wave form is shown with the output in the automatic reset mode. Select the
alarm action with care -- in some configurations, the front panel indicator (LED)
might be OFF while the output is ON. Refer to Configure Module 4 - Alarm
Parameters for details of configuring the alarms.
F
620
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Alarm Reset Sequence
Alarm Standby Delay Sequence
CALIBRATION CHECKS
RTD Ohms Reading Check
The instrument has been fully calibrated at the factory for all input types. If
the unit appears to be indicating or controlling incorrectly, see the
Troubleshooting section before attempting this procedure.
If the TLA is suspected of reading incorrectly, the instrument may be checked
for indication accuracy without disturbing the factory calibration. The following
procedures may be used for this purpose.
Note: Allow ½ hour warm-up before checking these parameters.
1. Connect RTD simulator (with an accuracy of 0.1 ohm or better) capable of
operating with less than 150 μA to terminals #8, #9, & #10.
2. Configure Input Parameters Module 1 for linear ohms (rLin) input, under tYPE.
3. Compare the TLA read-out with the RTD simulator at various points over the
range 2.0 to 300.0 ohms. The tolerance is ±(0.3% of span + 1 LSD).
4. Calibrate the TLA RTD ohms if out of tolerance.
mV Reading Check
If error flag “E-CL” appears at power-up, a loss of calibration parameters due
to noise spikes has occurred. Entering code 77 twice in Factory Service
Operations Module (9-FS) erases the TLA calibration values and defaults the
values to nominal settings. Reading errors of ±10% may result. It is
recommended that the TLA be fully recalibrated. If using thermocouple only,
the RTD calibration need not be performed.
Note: the “E-CL” flag may be cleared by “stepping” through cold junction
calibration procedure without the need to change any calibration values. A
±10% reading error will still exist.
1. Connect a DC mV source with an accuracy of 0.03% or better to terminal #8
(-) & #9 (+).
2. Configure Input Parameters Module 1 for linear mV (Lin) input, under tYPE.
3. Compare the TLA read-out to the standard at various points over the range (5.00 mV to 56.00 mV). The tolerance is ±(0.15% of reading + 1 LSD).
4. Calibrate the TLA if the readings are out of tolerance.
Thermocouple Cold Junction Temperature Check
F
Error Flag E-CL
1. Connect a thermocouple probe of known accuracy (Types T, E, J, K, N only)
to TLA. Select the probe used in Configure Module 1.
2. Connect a reference temperature probe to measuring end of thermocouple to
monitor temperature. Allow sufficient time for temperatures to equalize.
3. Compare TLA display with reference temperature probe. The TLA display
should equal the calibrated probe temperature. (Tolerance is ±1ºC.)
4. Calibrate the cold junction temperature if out of tolerance.
1-717-767-6511
621
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.0 CALIBRATION
When re-calibration is required (generally every two years), this procedure
should be performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.
Equipment source accuracy of 0.03% or better is required.
The procedure consists of: applying accurate mV signals, setting the
thermocouple cold junction temperature, and applying precision resistance,
among others. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before starting this procedure.
Do not use thermocouple wire for the millivolt or RTD ohms calibration.
This procedure may be aborted by disconnecting power to the TLA before
exiting the configuration mode. The existing calibration settings remain in
affect.
Note: After completing any of the calibration sequences, the TLA defaults the
input sensor type to thermocouple type “J” (tc-J). Be sure to set input sensor
for proper type.
Note: The TLA must be restored to normal display mode before any data is
stored.
Factory Service Operations - Calibration (9-FS)
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
RANGE
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
CodE
Enter function code
48
CAL
Millivolt calibration
yes/no
Calibration required for both RTD and TC input. If this procedure is performed,
the cold junction temp or RTD ohms calibration procedures in turn must be
completed.
CJC
Thermocouple cold junction
temperature calibration
yes/no
Not required if only using RTD input. This procedure can only be performed
AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
rtd
RTD resistance calibration
yes/no
Not required if only using TC input. This procedure can only be performed
AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
Millivolt Calibration (CAL)
Calibrate instrument.
RTD Ohms Calibration (RTD)
Connect precision millivolt source with an accuracy of 0.03% to terminals #8
(-) & #9 (+). Cold Junction or RTD ohms calibration MUST be performed after
millivolt calibration.
DISPLAY
ACTION
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
StP1
Apply 0.0 mV
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
StP2
Apply 14.0 mV
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
StP3
Apply 28.0 mV
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
StP4
Apply 42.0 mV
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
StP5
Apply 56.0 mV
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
This procedure must be performed AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
Connect one leg of precision resistance (accuracy of 0.1 ohm) to terminals #9
and #10 together, and the other leg to #8.
DISPLAY
ACTION
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
Rtd1
Connect 0.0 ohm
(jumper wire)
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
Rtd2
Connect 277.0 ohm
Wait 10 seconds, press P.
Thermocouple Cold Junction Calibration (CJC)
F
This procedure must be performed AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
1. Exit Factory Service Operations (continually press P until “End”), and return
to Normal Display Mode.
2. Connect a thermocouple probe of known accuracy to the TLA (Types T, E, J,
K, and N only). Select the probe type used in Configure Module 1.
3. Connect a reference temperature probe to the measuring end of the TLA
thermocouple probe. The two probes should be shielded from air movement
and allowed sufficient time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the
TLA thermocouple probe may be placed in a calibration bath of known
temperature.)
4. Compare TLA display with reference temperature probe (or calibration bath).
If the displayed TLA temperature does not equal the reference probe
temperature, calculate the CJ error as follows:
CJ Error = reference probe temperature - displayed TLA temperature
5. Enter Factory Service Operations Module (9-FS).
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS
CJC
Cold Junction
Temperature
Observe the indicated cold junction
temperature. Add the calculated CJ Error to
the displayed value. Enter the sum as the new
value for CJC. Exit 9-FS and repeat step 4.
Note: If the initial value for CJC is not within
the range of 15°C to 40°C, enter 25.0° for
CJC and repeat the Cold Junction Calibration
procedure.
622
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
The majority of problems can be traced to improper connections or incorrect
set-up parameters. Be sure all connections are clean and tight, that the correct
output board is fitted, and that the set-up parameters are correct.
PROBLEMS
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDIES
NO DISPLAY
1. Power off.
2. Brown-out condition.
3. Loose connection or improperly wired.
4. Bezel assembly not fully seated into rear of TLA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check power.
Verify power reading.
Check connections.
Check installation.
TLA NOT WORKING
1. Incorrect parameter set-up.
1. Check set-up parameters.
“E-FP” IN DISPLAY
1. Defective front panel button.
1. Press R to escape, then check all buttons for proper operation.
2. Replace unit.
“E-UP” IN DISPLAY
1. Internal problem with TLA.
1. Replace unit.
“E-E2” IN DISPLAY
1. Loss of setup parameters due to noise spike or
other EMI event.
1. Press R to escape, then check all set-up parameters.
a. Check sensor input and AC line for excessive noise.
b. If fault persists, replace TLA.
“E-CL” IN DISPLAY
1. Loss of calibration parameters due to noise
spike or other EMI event.
1. Press R to escape, then check TLA accuracy.
a. Recalibrate TLA. (See Factory Service Module code 77.)
b. Reset parameters to factory default settings.
“...” or “-..” IN DISPLAY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Display value exceeds display range.
Defective or mis-calibrated cold junction circuit.
Loss of set-up parameters.
Internal malfunction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Change resolution to display whole number and verify reading.
Perform cold junction calibration.
Check set-up parameters.
Perform Input calibration.
“OPEN” IN DISPLAY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Probe disconnected.
Broken or burned-out probe.
Corroded or broken terminations.
Excessive process temperature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect probe.
Replace probe.
Check connections.
Check process parameters.
“OLOL” IN UPPER DISPLAY
1. Check input parameters.
2. Change to input sensor with a higher
temperature range.
3. Replace transmitter or probe.
4. Reduce temperature.
5. Perform input calibration.
1. Input exceeds range of TLA.
2. Temperature exceeds range of input probe.
“ULUL” IN UPPER DISPLAY
1. Input is below range of TLA.
2. Temperature below range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive low temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
“OLOL” OR “ULUL” IN LOWER
DISPLAY
1. Signal input exceeds allowable range by 5%.
1. Check remote signal source.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive high temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.
Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a lower temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Raise temperature.
Perform input calibration.
F
1-717-767-6511
623
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
8.0 INSTALLING
AN
OUTPUT BOARD
The TLA is supplied with an output board installed.
Replacing Output Board
1. Remove the bezel assembly.
2. Lift up on the top bezel board latch while gently pulling out on the bezel/
display board assembly. Do NOT remove the display board from the bezel.
3. Remove the output board by pulling it away from the other boards. Replace
the output board by aligning the board to board connector. Be certain the
connector is fully mated.
4. Connect the bezel/ display board assembly by guiding the board ends into the
bezel latches. Slide the assembly on evenly until the display board connector
is completely engaged and bezel latches are fully seated onto the boards.
9.0 TERMINAL CONFIGURATIONS
DC Models
AC Models
Form-A Limit Relay with 2 Alarms
Form-A Limit Relay with 2 Alarms
Form-C Limit Relay with 1 Alarm
Form-C Limit Relay with 1 Alarm
F
624
www.redlion.net
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement